Menu

Revelation 3:18 — Word Study

Depth

N1904συμβουλεύω σοι ἀγοράσαι παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ χρυσίον πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρὸς ἵνα πλουτήσῃς, καὶ ἱμάτια λευκὰ ἵνα περιβάλῃ, καὶ μὴ φανερωθῇ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητός σου, καὶ κολλούριον ἵνα ἐγχρῖσαι τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου ἵνα βλέπῃς.

BSAI counselsumbouleuō [advise, guide] yousu to buyagorazō frompara Meegō gold [precious, refined metal] refinedpuroō byek firepur [purified, tested] so thathina you may be rich,plouteō [spiritually wealthy, prosperous] andkai garmentshimation [pure, spotless clothing] whiteleukos so thathina you may be clothedperiballō [covered, adorned] andkai not may be made manifestphaneroō theho shameaischunē of theho nakednessgumnotēs [exposed, vulnerable state] of you,su andkai eye-salvekollourion [healing ointment, eye salve] so thathina to anointegchriō theho eyesophthalmos [to rub in, to apply] of yousu so thathina you may see.blepō [perceive, understand]

Word
Listen & take awayRevelation 3
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 18 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (blepō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Revelation 3:18quick helps
In a sentenceJesus advises the Laodiceans to acquire true wealth and spiritual insight.
Who is speakingJesus, addressing the church in Laodicea.
Where we areThis verse is part of a message to the Laodicean church, focusing on their spiritual condition.
The hard wordσυμβουλεύω
Take awayTrue wealth comes from spiritual resources, not material possessions.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subject verbσυμβουλεύω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

2 of 33 occur nowhere else in the New Testament — words chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Revelation 3:18

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Message to Laodiceagenerated

17You say, ‘I am rich; I have grown wealthy and need nothing.’ But you do not realize that you are wretched, pitiful, poor, blind, and naked.
18I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may become rich, white garments so that you may be clothed and your shameful nakedness not exposed, and salve to anoint your eyes so that you may see.
19Those I love, I rebuke and discipline. Therefore be earnest and repent.
20Behold, I stand at the door and knock. If anyone hears My voice and opens the door, I will come in and dine with him, and he with Me.

Revelation 3:18 is part of a letter to the church in Laodicea, which was known for its wealth and self-sufficiency. However, Jesus points out their spiritual blindness and poverty, urging them to seek true riches through Him. This call to action highlights their need for spiritual renewal and insight, contrasting their material wealth with their spiritual state.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Psalm 16:7I will bless the LORD who counsels me; even at night my conscience instructs me.
2Psalm 32:8I will instruct you and teach you the way you should go; I will give you counsel and watch over you.
3Psalm 73:24You guide me with Your counsel, and later receive me in glory.
4Psalm 107:11because they rebelled against the words of God and despised the counsel of the Most High.
5Proverbs 1:25–30because you neglected all my counsel, and wanted none of my correction,

The Key Word συμβουλεύω, sumbouleuōgenerated

The word συμβουλεύω (sumbouleuō) means to counsel or advise, indicating a call to seek guidance. It emphasizes the importance of receiving wisdom and direction, particularly in spiritual matters. The present active indicative form indicates that this is an ongoing counsel from Jesus to the Laodiceans.

In this context, Jesus is not merely offering advice but is urging the church to take action based on His counsel. The collaborative aspect of consulting implies that the Laodiceans need to engage with His guidance actively.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The Berean Standard Bible translates the verse as I counsel you, which is consistent across several versions including the KJV and ASV.

However, the BBE uses If you are wise you will get from me, emphasizing a conditional aspect that others do not.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb in this verse is συμβουλεύω, I counsel, which governs several clauses that detail what the counsel entails. The structure includes a series of infinitive phrases that specify what to buy and the purpose behind the counsel.

The verse contains multiple clauses that elaborate on the items to be acquired: gold, garments, and salve, each with its own purpose, forming a complex sentence that conveys a rich message.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

συμβουλεύω has parallels in the Septuagint, where it translates the Hebrew verb יָעַץ (H3289), meaning to advise or counsel. This connection highlights the continuity of the concept of seeking wisdom from God.

The use of ἀγοράζω in this context aligns with its Septuagint usage, where it often refers to acquiring something valuable, reinforcing the idea of seeking spiritual riches.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Revelation 3:18 contains Jesus' advice to the Laodicean church, urging them to buy gold, white garments, and eye salve from Him. This counsel indicates their need for spiritual wealth, proper clothing, and sight, contrasting their material wealth with their true spiritual condition.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does Jesus mean by 'gold refined by fire'?

This refers to spiritual wealth that is tested and purified, contrasting with material riches.

Why does Jesus mention 'white garments'?

White garments symbolize purity and righteousness, which the Laodiceans lacked despite their material wealth.

What is the significance of 'salve to anoint your eyes'?

This salve represents spiritual insight and healing, addressing the Laodiceans' blindness to their true condition.

How can we apply this counsel today?

We can seek true spiritual wealth and insight through Christ, recognizing our need for His guidance in our lives.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what areas of my life do I feel self-sufficient, and how can I seek God's counsel instead?
  2. What does it mean to me to be spiritually rich, and how can I pursue that?
  3. How can I ensure that I am clothed in righteousness rather than relying on my own efforts?
  4. What steps can I take to gain spiritual insight and avoid spiritual blindness?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers comment on this verse, interpreting the counsel of Jesus and its implications for spiritual wealth and insight.

TertullianOn Monogamy c. 155–220
Us, moreover, Jesus, the Father's Highest and Great Priest, clothing us from His own store -inasmuch as they "who are baptized in Christ have put on Christ"-has made "priests to God His Father," according to John.
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 3 →
OecumeniusCommentary on Revelation 6th c.
I counsel you to buy from me gold refined by fire, that you may be rich. But what is this gold refined by the spiritual fire? The prophet teaches, saying "the words of the Lord are pure words,
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 3 →
Alcuin of YorkCOMMENTARY ON REVELATION c. 735–804
I counsel thee to buy gold fire-tried, that thou mayest be made rich. Gold in this passage is taken to mean God's wisdom incarnate, concerning which it is said elsewhere, Take wisdom as gold. [Variant of Prov.
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 3 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Revelation 3:18 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

I counsel thee,.... Christ is a Counsellor, and is every way fit to be one, for he is the all wise God, the Ancient of days, and the Father of his people, and, as Mediator, the Wisdom of God; and he

Read John Gill on Revelation 3 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

I counsel thee to buy of me gold tried in the fire, that thou mayest be rich; and white raiment, that thou mayest be clothed, and that the shame of thy nakedness do not appear; and anoint thine eyes

Read Robert Jamieson on Revelation 3 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

Buying being the usual way amongst men to procure what they want, it is not to be wondered at, that the procuring of that spiritual blessing here mentioned is expressed under this notion; though our buying of God spiritual good things be without money and without price. It is not to be doubted, but that which is here propounded to be bought (that is, obtained, and procured by such ways and means as God hath directed) is Christ himself, with all his benefits, in whom there is a sufficient spiritual supply for all our spiritual wants; that which to the soul will answer whatever gold serveth the body for; and which to the soul answereth what clothing is to the body, viz. righteousness, wherein…

Read Matthew Poole on Revelation 3 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

18 I counsel thee to buy of me gold tried in the fire, that thou mayest be rich; and white raiment, that thou mayest be clothed, and that the shame of thy nakedness do not appear; and anoint thine eyes with eyesalve, that thou mayest see. Ver. 18. I counsel thee] Having first convinced thee, Revelation 3:17, who before wert uncounselable; the Gibeonites sent not for Joshua till besieged; the Gileadites sought not after Jephthah till distressed; nor will men hearken after Christ till driven out of themselves. To buy of me] "Buy the truth and sell it not." Make a thorough sale of sin and all (with the wise merchant) to purchase Christ the pearl of price, for whom St Paul (that great trader…

Read John Trapp on Revelation 3 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(18) I counsel thee to buy.—There is, perhaps, a touch of irony here. How could the poor and naked buy? But the irony has no sting, for the counsel but recalled the invitation of the prophet to buy “without money and without price” (Isaiah 55:1). Gold—i.e., golden coin, “tried,” or, fired out of fire, and so free from alloy or dross. Trench suggests that “gold” here stands for faith. Does not, however, the self-deceiving state of this Church rather point to love as the missing grace? The Laodiceans were as those who had many graces in appearance; they were not unlike one who had gifts, tongues, understanding, liberality, but lacked that fervent love without which all was as nothing (1…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Revelation 3 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 18. I counsel thee] O fallen and deceived soul, hear Jesus! Thy case is not hopeless. Buy of me. Gold tried in the fire] Come and receive from me, without money and without price, faith that shall stand in every trial: so gold tried in the fire is here understood. But it may mean pure and undefiled religion, or that grace or Divine influence which produces it, which is more valuable to the soul than the purest gold to the body. They had before imaginary riches; this alone can make them truly rich. White raiment] Holiness of heart and life. Anoint thine eyes] Pray for, that ye may receive, the enlightening influences of my Spirit, that ye may be convinced of your true state, and see…

Read AdamClarke on Revelation 3 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

18. I counsel thee] “There is deep irony in this word. One who has need of nothing, yet needs counsel on the vital points of self-preservation.”to buy] Cf. Isaiah 55:1 : the counsel to a poor beggar to buy is of course meaningless, unless he can buy “without money and without price,” or, as the Hebrew of that passage more literally means, “for (what is) not money and for (what is) not a price.” Thus the word is not a mere synonym for “receive:” the sense is, “Thou hast nothing to give, but thou must give all that thou hast” (Matthew 13:44; Matthew 13:46). The nothingness of human merit is a reason against exalting self, but not a reason for sparing self: the Lord does not bid us say, “We…

Read Cambridge on Revelation 3 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

I counsel thee to buy of me gold tried in the fire - Pure gold; such as has been subjected to the action of heat to purify it from dross. See the notes on 1 Peter 1:7.

Read Albert Barnes on Revelation 3 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may become rich, white garments so that you may be clothed and your shameful nakedness not exposed, and salve to anoint your eyes so that you may see.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

I counsel you to buy from me gold refined by fire, that you may become rich; and white garments, that you may clothe yourself, and that the shame of your nakedness may not be revealed; and eye salve to anoint your eyes, that you may see.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may become rich, white garments so that you may be clothed and your shameful nakedness not exposed, and salve to anoint your eyes so that you may see.

NETBNew English Translation2006

take my advice and buy gold from me refined by fire so you can become rich! Buy from me white clothing so you can be clothed and your shameful nakedness will not be exposed, and buy eye salve to put on your eyes so you can see!

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

I counsel thee to buy of me gold tried in the fire, that thou mayest be rich; and white raiment, that thou mayest be clothed, and that the shame of thy nakedness do not appear; and anoint thine eyes with eyesalve, that thou mayest see.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

I counsel thee to buy of me gold refined by fire, that thou mayest become rich; and white garments, that thou mayest clothe thyself, and that the shame of thy nakedness be not made manifest; and eyesalve to anoint thine eyes, that thou mayest see.

RVARevised Version, American1894

I counsel thee to buy of me gold refined by fire, that thou mayest become rich; and white garments, that thou mayest clothe thyself, and that the shame of thy nakedness be not made manifest; and eyesalve to anoint thine eyes, that thou mayest see.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

I counsel thee to buy of me gold tried in the fire, that thou mayest be rich; and white raiment, that thou mayest be clothed, and that the shame of thy nakedness may not appear; and anoint thy eyes with eye-salve, that thou mayest see.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

I counsell thee to bye of me gold tried by the fire, that thou maiest bee made rich: and white raiment, that thou maiest be clothed, and that thy filthie nakednesse doe not appeare: and anoynt thine eyes with eye salue, that thou maiest see.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

I counsel thee to buy of me gold purified by fire, that thou mayest be rich; and white garments, that thou mayest be clothed, and that the shame of thy nakedness may not be made manifest; and eye-salve to anoint thine eyes, that thou mayest see.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

I counsel thee to buy from me gold fired by fire, that thou mayest be rich, and white garments that thou mayest be arrayed, and the shame of thy nakedness may not be manifest, and with eye-salve anoint thine eyes, that thou mayest see.

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

I counsel you to buy from Me gold fired by fire, that you may be rich, and white garments that you may be clothed, and the shame of your nakedness may not be revealed, and with eye-salve anoint your eyes, that you may see.

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Listen to my advice: Buy from me gold refined by fire so that you may become rich, and brilliant white garments so you may clothe yourself and not show the shame of your nakedness, and salve to anoint your eyes so you will see.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

I counsel thee to buy of me gold fire tried, that thou mayest be made rich; and mayest be clothed in white garments, and that the shame of thy nakedness may not appear; and anoint thy eyes with eyesalve, that thou mayest see.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

I advise you to buy from me gold refined by fire so you may be rich; and have white clothes so you can be properly dressed and you won't reveal your nakedness and shame; and ointment to put on your eyes so you can see.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

If you are wise you will get from me gold tested by fire, so that you may have true wealth; and white robes to put on, so that your shame may not be seen; and oil for your eyes, so that you may see.

Word by word, the decisions they made

συμβουλεύωsumbouleuō I counsel G4823 2 different renderings
i counselASV BSB DBY DRA KJV LSV MSB NWB RVA WEB YLT
adviseFBV
ἀγοράσαιagorazō to buy G59 2 different renderings
to buyASV BSB DBY DRA FBV KJV LSV MSB NWB RVA WEB YLT
buyNETB ULB
πυρὸςpur fire G4442 3 different renderings
fireASV BSB DRA FBV GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
purifiedDBY
testedBBE
πλουτήσῃς,plouteō you may be rich, G4147 3 different renderings
richASV BSB DRA GNV MSB NETB RVA ULB WEB
be richDBY KJV NWB YLT
you may be richFBV LSV
ἱμάτιαhimation garments G2440 3 different renderings
garmentsASV BSB DBY DRA LSV MSB RVA ULB WEB YLT
clothingNETB
clothesFBV
περιβάλῃ,periballō you may be clothed G4016 2 different renderings
you may be clothedBSB LSV MSB
clothed inDRA

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseclauseὅτιForclauseclauseverbλέγειςyou sayclauseὅτι-clauseclausepredicateΠλούσιόςRichlinking verbεἰμιI amκαὶandclauseverbπεπλούτηκαI have grown richκαὶandclausenoun phrase · objectοὐδὲνof nothingχρείανneedverbἔχωI haveκαὶAndclauseadverbialοὐκnotverbοἶδαςdo you realizeclauseὅτιthatclausesubjectσὺyoulinking verbεἶarenoun phrase · predicate-adjective phraseταλαίπωροςwretchedκαὶandἐλεεινὸςmiserableκαὶandπτωχὸςpoorκαὶandτυφλὸςblindκαὶandγυμνόςnakedclauseverbσυμβουλεύωI counselindirect objectσοιyouclause · objectclauseverbἀγοράσαιto buyprepositional phrase · adverbialπαρ’fromἐμοῦMenoun phrase · objectχρυσίονgoldadjective phraseclauseverbπεπυρωμένονhaving been refinedprepositional phrase · adverbialἐκbyπυρὸςfireclauseἵναso thatclauseverbπλουτήσῃςyou may be richκαὶandclausenoun phrase · objectἱμάτιαgarmentsλευκὰwhiteclauseἵναso thatclauseclauseverbπεριβάλῃyou may be clothedκαὶandclauseadverbialμὴnotverbφανερωθῇmight be made manifestnoun phrase · subjectthenoun phraseαἰσχύνηshamenoun phraseτῆςof thenoun phraseγυμνότητόςnakednessσουof youκαὶandclauseobjectκολλούριονeye-salveclause · adverbialverbἐγχρῖσαιto anointnoun phrase · objectτοὺςthenoun phraseὀφθαλμούςeyesσουof youclauseἵναso thatclauseverbβλέπῃςyou may see

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Suadeo tibi emere a me aurum ignitum probatum, ut locuples fias, et vestimentis albis induaris, et non appareat confusio nuditatis tuæ, et collyrio inunge oculos tuos ut videas.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܡܠܟ ܐܢܐ ܠܟ ܕܬܙܒܢ ܡܢܝ ܕܗܒܐ ܕܒܚܝܪ ܡܢ ܢܘܪܐ ܕܬܥܬܪ ܘܡܐܢܐ ܚܘܪܐ ܠܡܬܥܛܦܘ ܘܠܐ ܬܬܓܠܐ ܒܗܬܬܐ ܕܥܪܛܠܝܘܬܟ ܘܫܝܦܐ ܟܚܘܠ ܕܬܚܙܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

συμβουλεύω σοι ἀγοράσαι παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ χρυσίον πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρὸς ἵνα πλουτήσῃς, καὶ ἱμάτια λευκὰ ἵνα περιβάλῃ, καὶ μὴ φανερωθῇ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητός σου, καὶ κολλούριον ἐγχρῖσαι τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου ἵνα βλέπῃς.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

συμβουλεύω σοι ἀγοράσαι παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ χρυσίον πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρὸς ἵνα πλουτήσῃς, καὶ ἱμάτια λευκὰ ἵνα περιβάλῃ, καὶ μὴ φανερωθῇ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητός σου, καὶ κολλούριον ἐγχρῖσαι τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου ἵνα βλέπῃς.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

συμβουλεύω σοι ἀγοράσαι παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ χρυσίον πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρὸς ἵνα πλουτήσῃς, καὶ ἱμάτια λευκὰ ἵνα περιβάλῃ, καὶ μὴ φανερωθῇ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητός σου, καὶ κολλούριον ἐγχρῖσαι τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου ἵνα βλέπῃς.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

συμβουλεύω σοι ἀγοράσαι παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ χρυσίον πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρὸς ἵνα πλουτήσῃς, καὶ ἱμάτια λευκὰ ἵνα περιβάλῃ, καὶ μὴ φανερωθῇ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητός σου, καὶ κολλούριον ἐγχρῖσαι τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου ἵνα βλέπῃς.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

συμβουλεύω σοι ἀγοράσαι παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ χρυσίον πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρὸς ἵνα πλουτήσῃς, καὶ ἱμάτια λευκὰ ἵνα περιβάλῃ, καὶ μὴ φανερωθῇ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητός σου, καὶ κολλούριον ἐγχρῖσαι τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου ἵνα βλέπῃς.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

συμβουλεύω σοι ἀγοράσαι παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ χρυσίον πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρὸς ἵνα πλουτήσῃς, καὶ ἱμάτια λευκὰ ἵνα περιβάλῃ, καὶ μὴ φανερωθῇ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητός σου, καὶ κολλούριον ἐγχρῖσαι τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου ἵνα βλέπῃς.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

συμβουλεύω σοι ἀγοράσαι παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρὸς ἵνα πλουτήσῃς, καὶ ἱμάτια λευκὰ ἵνα περιβάλῃ, καὶ μὴ φανερωθῇ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητός σου, καὶ κολλούριον ἵνα τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου ἵνα βλέπῃς.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

συμβουλεύω σοι ἀγοράσαι παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ χρυσίον πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρὸς ἵνα πλουτήσῃς, καὶ ἱμάτια λευκὰ ἵνα περιβάλῃ, καὶ μὴ φανερωθῇ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητός σου, καὶ κολλούριον τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου ἵνα βλέπῃς.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
χρυσίον goldNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TRByz
ἵνα so thatByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, TR
ἐγχρῖσαι to anointNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Revelation 3:18συμβουλεύωI counselI counselσυμβουλεύωσύyouyouσύἀγοράζωto buyto buyἀγοράζωπαράfromfromπαράἐγώMeMeἐγώχρυσίονgoldgoldχρυσίονπυρόωrefinedrefinedπυρόωἐκbybyἐκπῦρfirefireπῦρἵναso thatso thatἵναπλουτέωyou may be you may be richπλουτέωκαίandandκαίἱμάτιονgarmentsgarmentsἱμάτιονλευκόςwhitewhiteλευκόςἵναso thatso thatἵναπεριβάλλωyou may be you may be clotπεριβάλλωκαίandandκαίμήnotnotμήφανερόωmay be mademay be made manφανερόωthetheαἰσχύνηshameshameαἰσχύνηof theof theγυμνότηςnakednessnakednessγυμνότηςσύof you,of you,σύκαίandandκαίκολλούριονeye-salveeye-salveκολλούριονἵναso thatso thatἵναἐγχρίωto anointto anointἐγχρίωthetheὀφθαλμόςeyeseyesὀφθαλμόςσύof youof youσύἵναso thatso thatἵναβλέπωyou may seeyou may see.βλέπωἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦArticle thArticle theὀπτάνομαιv. I appeav. I appear, amὀπτάνομαισύνPrep. withPrep. withσύνἀγοράn.f. marken.f. market-plaἀγοράπῦρn.n. fire,n.n. fire, triaπῦρπλουτίζωv. I make v. I make richπλουτίζωπερίPrep. abouPrep. about, coπερίφανερόςAdj appareAdj apparent, cφανερόςαἰσχύνωv. I am asv. I am ashamedαἰσχύνωγυμνόςAdj wearinAdj wearing onlγυμνόςχρυσόςn.m. anythn.m. anything mχρυσόςοὐNeg.prt. nNeg.prt. no, noοὐκολλάωv. I glue,v. I glue, cleaκολλάωπληρόωv. I fill,v. I fill, fulfπληρόωχαράn.f. joy, n.f. joy, gladnχαράἀμήνHebr. veriHebr. verily, tἀμήνἐνPrep. in, Prep. in, on, aἐν
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Revelation 3:18

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
συμβουλεύωsumbouleuō I counsel G4823 Verb · present · active · indicative · first person · singular
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To consult means to give or take advice with others, as in Matthew 26:4. It is about discussing and deciding together, like in Acts 9:23.
Amplified meaning
advise, guide
Tyndale gloss
to consult
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word συμβουλεύω (sumbouleuō) means to advise or counsel, often involving a collaborative aspect of giving or receiving advice. It can denote both the act of advising someone and the process of consulting with others. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts related to giving counsel (e.g., John 18:14) and deliberating together (e.g., Matthew 26:4). The lexicons do not present significant disagreements on its meaning.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

συμ-βουλεύω; 1 aor. συνεβούλευσα; 1 aor. mid. συνεβουλευσάμην; fr. [Theogn., Soph.], Hdt. down; Sept. for yy. and γ»}}} 1. to give counsel: τινί, In. xviii. 14; foll. by an inf. Rev. iii. 18. 2. Mid. to take counsel with others, take counsel together, to consult, deliberate: foll. by ἵνα (see ἵνα, Il. 2 a.), Mt. xxvi. 4; Jn. xi. 53 [RG Tr mrg.]; foll. by a telic inf., Acts ix. 23.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

συμβουλεύω, “advise,” “counsel,” (1) act.: cf. BGU IV. 10978 (Claudius/Nero) (as amended Berichtigungen, p- 97) οὐ καλῶς érol[i]noas συνβουλεύσας αὐτῶι στρατεύσασθαι, P Oxy XIV. 1762! (ii/iii a.p.) Uva αὐτῷ περὶ τούτων συμβου[λε]ύσῃς : cf. the pass. in 76. I. 118% (late iii/a.p.) συμβουλευθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀξιολογωτάτου ᾿Αμμωνίωνος. (2) mid. : P Petr II. 13 (6)13 (B.c. 258-3) (as amended III. p- 110) ὡς ἂν o[u]vBovdevoapévwr φα[ζίνηται, “as it shall appear to you after you have considered the matter,” OGTS 4417® (B.c. 81) Λεύκιος. [ . Σύλλας ᾿Επαφρόδιτος δικτ]άτωρ συγκλήτωι συ[νεβουλεύσατο πρὸ ἡμερῶν ἕξ], and see Herwerden Zex. s.v.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

συμβουλεύω (sumbouleuō) — to consult.

συμβουλ-εύω,

advise, counsel, with dative person et infinitive, advise one to do a thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ συμβουλεύων Ερξῃ στρατεύεσθαι advising him not.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, συμβουλεύω.. συμβῆναι ὑμᾶς I advise that you should.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. without infinitive, σ. τινί τι [Refs 6th c.BC+]; σ. τι recommend a measure, τὰ ἄριστα [Refs 5th c.BC+] give advice, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, συμβουλεύεταί τι advice is given, [Refs 5th c.BC+]res de consilii sententia actae, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; of persons, to be advised, ὑπό τινος [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

3. followed by a relative, σ. περί τινος ὡς.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

συμβουλεύω

sumbouleuo

from 4862 and 1011; to give (or take) advice jointly, i.e. recommend,

deliberate or determine:--consult, (give, take) counsel (together).

see GREEK for 4862

see GREEK for 1011

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

συμβουλεύω

v.

I give advice

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

συμβουλεύω symbouleuō 4x

to counsel, advise, exhort, Jn. 18:14; Rev. 3:18; mid. to consult together, plot, Mt. 26:4; Acts 9:23*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

συμβουλεύω fut. σω to advise, counsel, Lat. consulere alicui, c. dat. pers. et inf., to advise one to do a thing, Hdt., Thuc., etc.

without the inf., ς. τινί τι Hdt., Plat.; ς. τι to recommend a measure, Hdt., attic:—Pass., τὰ συμβουλευόμενα the advice given, Xen.

absol. to advise, give advice, Soph.; ὁ συμβουλεύων or -εύσας, an adviser, Lat. auctor sententiae, Arist.

Mid. to consult with a person, i. e. ask his advice, Lat. consulere aliquem, c. dat., Hdt., etc.: absol. to consult, deliberate, Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAI-1S — Verb · present · active · indicative · first person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-1S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Pr 1:5; 9:9; 11:14; 12:15; 15:22; 19:20; 20:18; 24:6; 27:9

→ See PRUDENCE

→ REJECTED Pr 1:24-33

→ INSTANCES OF

By Rehoboam 1Ki 12:8-16

By the rich young ruler Mt 19:22

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(1) The importance of Seeking

Pr 11:14; 12:15; 13:10; 15:22; 20:18

--SEE Instruction (1), INSTRUCTION

Guidance, (3), GUIDANCE

Counsellors, COUNSELLORS

(2) Wise, Examples of

Ex 18:19; 1Ki 12:7; Da 4:27; Mt 27:19; Ac 5:35; Re 3:18

--SEE Exhortations, EXHORTATIONS

(3) Evil

Nu 31:16; 1Ki 12:10,28; 2Ch 10:10; 22:3;

Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 8 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 7.384c. AD 75–95

διὸ ζῶν ἔτι καὶ πρὸς αὐτῷ γεγονὼς τῷ τελευτᾶν παραινῶ σοι ταῦθʼ ἃ καὶ πρότερον ἔφθην συμβουλεύσας, δικαίῳ μὲν εἶναι πρὸς τοὺς ἀρχομένους, εὐσεβεῖ δὲ πρὸς τὸν τὴν βασιλείαν δεδωκότα θεόν, φυλάττειν δʼ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἐντολὰς καὶ τοὺς νόμους, οὓς αὐτὸς διὰ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. BC 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Ryl. 4 603Oxyrhynchos8 BC

τὰ γενήματα αὐτῶν καὶ στρατιώτην καὶ αὐτοὺς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους οὓς ὀχλῆσαι δύνασθε· ὥστε ἐκτελέσατε συμβουλεύω. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους κγ Καίσαρος Μεσορὴ κγ

P.Freib. 4 68AD 101–AD 300

ὑπʼ ἀνθρώπου τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον διακειμένου παραμεληθῆναι. ἑτέρων σοι διαφερόντων νῦν καὶ τόνδε δέξαι. συμβουλεύω ἑτέρως ἵνα ἡμᾶς σκέψασθαι ας … … … . καὶ τεθαρρημένως σαυτὸν ἐπίδος ἐπὶ

P.Gen. 1 1ArsinoitesAD 213

ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν ἀηττήτου Αὐτοκράτορος Ἀντωνείνου Εὐσεβοῦς τειμᾶσθαι οὐδείς ἐστιν ὁ ἀγνοῶν. διὸ συμβουλεύω ὑμῖν αἰδημόνως περὶ τοῦς οικειους αὐτοῦ προσενεχθῆναι μηδὲ βιαίως ἐπὶ τὰ κτήματα αὐτοῦ ἐπιτρέχειν

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
σοιsu you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · dative · singular
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2DS — Personal pronoun · second person · dative · singular
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2DS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Dative Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύyou2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
ἀγοράσαιagorazō to buy G59 Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
30× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To buy or purchase something, often used to describe redemption, as in Matthew 13:44 and Revelation 3:18, where it refers to buying back or redeeming something.
Tyndale gloss
to buy
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀγοράζω (i.e., *agorazō*) means to buy or purchase, particularly in a market context. It can also imply redeeming or acquiring something at a price. In the New Testament, it appears in various forms, such as in Matthew 21:12 and Revelation 5:9, where it conveys both literal and metaphorical meanings of buying or redeeming.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀγοράζω

(< ἀγορά),

[in LXX chiefly for שׁבר, קנה;]

to frequent the ἀγορά (Hdt., al.).

to buy in the market, purchase (Xen., al.; LXX; in π. very common in deeds of sale, v. MM, VGT, s.v.): absol., Mt 21:12, Mk 11:15; c. acc. rei, Mt 13:44, 46, al.; seq. παρά, c. gen. pers., Re 3:18 (LXX, Polyb.); ἐκ, Mt 27:7; c. gen. pret., Mk 6:37, al.; metaph., I Co 6:20 7:23, II Pe 2:1, Re 5:9 14:3…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀγοράζω ; [impf. ἠγόραζον ; fut. ἀγοράσω] ; 1 aor. ἦγόpaca; Pass., pf. ptep. ἠγορασμένος ; 1 20r. ἠγοράσθην; (ἀγορά); 1. to frequent the market-place. 2. to buy (properly, in the market-place), [Arstph., Xen., al.]; used a. literally: absol.. Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45 [not G T Tr WH]; τί, Mt. xiii. 44, 46; xiv. 15 and parallel pass., Jn. iv. 8; vi.5; with παρά and gen. of the pers. fr. whom, Rev. iii. 18, [Sept., Polyb.]; ἐκ and gen. of price, Mt. xxvii. 7; simple gen. of price, Mk. vi. 37. b. figuratively: Christ is said . to have purchased his disciples i. e. made them, as it were, his private property, 1 Co. vi. 20 [this is commonly understood of God; but cf. Jn. xvii. 9,10]; 1 Co. vii. 23 (with gen. of price added; see τιμή, 1); 2 Pet. ii. 1. He is also said to have bought them for God ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ, by shedding his blood, Rev. v. 9; they, too, are spoken of as…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀγοράζω. The verb (MGr = “‘ buy ”) is common in deeds of sale, e. g. P Lond 882*4 (z.c. 101) (= III. p. 14) ἣν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ O., 26. 1208) (8.6, 97) (=IIT. p. 19). It is used of the purchase of slaves in OG/S 33878 (the will of Attalus II1.—B.c. 133): cf. 1 Cor 650, 7% τιμῆς ἠγοράσθητε (Deissmann LA Z, Ρ. 328). So P Oxy VIII. 11495 ff. (ii/a.p.) ἀ[γο]ράσαι παρὰ Tacap[a]mlwvos ὃν ἔχει δοῦλον Σαραπίωνα, ‘to buy from Tasarapion her slave Sarapion,” a/. Both the verb and the corresponding substantive are found in P Oxy II. 2051). 48, a long letter by a tax-collector of i/A.D., στατῆρας πορφύ[ρ]ας ἀγόρασον . . . ἐὰν εὕρῃς ἀγ[οἱραστὴν τοῦ μέρ[ους] τῆς οἰκίας. For ἀγοραστός, see also P Petr II. 2011. 5,8 (B.C, 252) τοῦ ἀγοραστοῦ = ‘‘(wheat) for sale,” and P Tebt I. 301! (A.p. 123) (= Se/ectrons, p. 78) ἀγοραστὴν παρὰ Θενπετεσούχον . . . οἰκίαν, “the house as purchased from Thenpetesuchus,” αὐ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀγοράζω (agorazō) — to buy.

ἀγοράζω [ᾰγ],

future άσω [LXX+5th c.BC+]: aorist ἠγόρασα[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἠγόρακα[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, aorist ἠγορασάμην[Refs 4th c.BC+]perfect ἠγόρασμαι (see. below):—passive, aorist ἠγοράσθην[Refs]: perfect ἠγόρασμαι[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—frequent the ἀγορά, αἱ γυναῖκες ἀ. καὶ καπηλεύουσι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; occupy the market-place, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. buy in the market, πωλεῖν ἀ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; generally, buy, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; farm taxes or state-contracts, ὠνὴν ἀ.[Refs]:—middle, buy for oneself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, διάτινος ἀ.[Refs 4th c.BC+]: perfect passive in middle sense, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἠγοράσθαι αὐτοῖς τὸν οἶνον[Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀγοράζω

agorazo

from 58; properly, to go to market, i.e. (by implication) to purchase;

specially, to redeem:--buy, redeem.

see GREEK for 58

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀγοράζω

v.

I buy

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀγοράζω agorazō 30x

to buy; redeem, acquire by a ransom or price paid

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀγοράζω (also in mid. sense); to be in the ἀγορά, frequent it, Hdt.: to occupy the market-place, Thuc.

to buy in the market, buy, purchase, Ar., Xen.; Mid. to buy for oneself, id. Xen., etc.

as a mark of idle fellows, to lounge in the ἀγορά, Thuc.; cf. ἀγοραῖος.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAN — Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5658

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
13%buying
buying13% · 4×buy10% · 3×they may buy10% · 3×you were bought6% · 2×having bought6% · 2×redeemed6% · 2×buys6% · 2×do buy6% · 2×other renderings35% · 11×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 18 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb97%adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 30 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἔχωI have, hold, poπωλέωI sellαὐτός
Article the
καίand, even, also,χιλιάςa thousand
κώμηa village
Article theκαίand, even, also,
αὐτός
δέbut, on the othe
λαμβάνωI receive, take
δέbut, on the othe
ἀγοράζωto buy30×
what comes after →
ἑαυτοῦ
βρῶμαfood of any kindτίςIrg
Article the
ἀγρόςa field, the couθεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
δεσπότηςa lord, master,
ἐν
Article the
ἀπό
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀγοράζω · 30× in the New Testament
Matthew Revelation Luke Mark 1 Corinthians John 2 Peter
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 14 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 12.175c. AD 75–95

Ἐνστάσης δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας, καθʼ ἣν ἔμελλεν τὰ τέλη πιπράσκεσθαι τῶν πόλεων, ἠγόραζον οἱ τοῖς ἀξιώμασιν ἐν ταῖς πατρίσιν διαφέροντες.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 32Pathyris102 BC

γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἄρουραν α, ὧν αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ τῆς προκειμένης συνγραφῆς, ἣν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Πετεαρσεμθέως τοῦ Πανεβχούνιος πρὸς χαλκοῦ τάλαντα β, τέλος Ασ, γίνονται χαλκοῦ δραχμαὶ Ασ.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

παστοφορίου ἐντὸς τοῦ περιβόλου τοῦ ἐπιβάλλοντος αὐτῶι μέρους τετάρτου, ὧν αἱ γειτνίαι δεδηλῶνται, ὃν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Νεχούτου τοῦ Σχώτου ἱερέως Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης χαλκοῦ Γ, τέλος τ. Παγκράτης.

P.Grenf. 2 36Pathyris96 BC

τὸν μῦν καταβεβρωκέναι τὸν σπόρον. καλῶς ἡμῖν ὦδε, ἢ ἐν Διοσπόλει ἐὰν αἱρῆσθε, πυρὸν ἀγοράσαι ἥκετε. τὰ δʼ ἄλλα χαρίζοισθʼ ἑαυτῶν ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε. ἔρρωται Ὧρος καὶ Πετοσῖρις. ἔρρωσθε.

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
παρ᾽para from G3844 Preposition
192× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Means 'from' or 'beside', indicating the source or origin of something, as seen in Mark 14:43 and John 15:26. It can also mean 'at' or 'in the vicinity of' something. Used to show the relationship between people or things.
Tyndale gloss
from/with/beside
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παρά is a preposition that conveys the idea of proximity, meaning 'beside' or 'from the side of.' It can take the genitive, dative, or accusative case, indicating source, location, or motion towards something. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts involving relationships, such as 'his family' (Mk 3:21) or 'from God' (Jn 9:16). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρά, prep. c. gen., dat., acc.,

with radical sense, beside.

C. gen. pers., from the side of, from beside, from, indicating source or origin, [in LXX for מֵאֵצֶל, מִיַד, מִלִּפְנֵי;] after verbs of motion, Mk 14:43, Lk 8:49, Jo 15:26, al.; after verbs of seeking, receiving, hearing, etc., Mk 8:11 12:2, Jo 4:9, 52 10:18, Phl 4:18, II Ti 1:18, Ja 1:7, al.; after passive verbs, of the agent (like ὑπό), Mt 21:42, Mk 12:11, Lk 1:37; absol., οἱ παρ’ αὐτοῦ, his family, his kinsfolk, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρά, [it neglects elision before prop. names beginning with a vowel, and (at least in Tdf.’s text) before some other words; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95, cf. W. § 5, 1 a.; B. 10], a preposition indicating close proximity, with various modifications corresponding to the various cases with which it is joined; ef. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 643 sqq.; Matthiae § 588; Bnhdy. p. 255 sqq.; Ktihner § 440; Kriiger § 68, 34-36. It is joined I. with the GenitIvE; and as in Grk. prose writ. always with the gen. of a person, to denote that a thing proceeds from the side or the vicinity of one, or from one’s sphere of power, or from one’s wealth or store, Lat. a, ab; Germ.von ... her, von neben; French de chez; [Eng. from beside, from]; Sept. for *339D, 7°, Syxn (1S. xvii. 30); cf. W. 364 (342) sq- a. properly, with a suggestion of union of place or of residence, after verbs of coming, departing, setting out…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παρά is found in the NT c. gen. (78 times), c. dat. (50 times), and c. acc. (60 times): see Proleg. p. 106. All these constructions can be freely illustrated from our sources. (1) c. gen. indicating source or origin ‘‘ from the side of,” “*from,’’ used of persons after verbs of receiving etc.: Ostr 10278 (Ptol.) (= LAZ, p. 152) ἀπέχω παρὰ σοῦ τὸ ἐπιβάλλον (cf. Lk 1515) μοι ἐκφόριον, “1 have received from you the fruit that falleth to me,” P Petr 11. τι (1)° (mid. iii/B.c.) = Witkowski’, p. 8) γίνωσκε δέ pe ἔχοντα παρὰ Φιλωνίδου (δραχμὰς) o, P Eleph 13? (B.C. 223-2) (= Witkowski’, p. 42) παραγενομένου Lav@tos ἐκομισάμην τὴν παρὰ cov ἐπιστολήν, P Tebt II. 28322 (B.c. 93 or 60) τούτου δὲ γενομ[έϊνου ἔσομαι τετευχὼς [TH]s Tapa cod ἀντιλήμψεως, ‘* for if this is done I shall have obtained succour from you” (Edd.), P Oxy IV. 742? (B.c. 2) παράλαβε παρὰ Πόθου τὸν κάλαμ[ο]ν πανα[ρ]ιθμῶι, ‘take…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παρά (para) — from/with/beside.

πᾰρά [ρᾰ],

Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also παραί: shortened πάρ, in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Lyric poetry (but rarely in Trag., in Lyric poetry passages, [Refs 5th c.BC+], and in all dial ects except Attic dialect, [Refs 4th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative, properly beside: hence,

__A WITH GEN. properly denoting motion from the side of, from beside, from:

__A.I of Place, πὰρ νηῶν ἔλθωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πλευρὰ παρ᾽ ἀσπίδος ἐξεφαάνθη was exposed beside the shield,[Refs 4th c.BC+]

__A.II commonly of Persons,

__A.II.1 with Verbs of going or coming, bringing, etc., ἦλθε.. πὰρ Διός [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὁ π. τινὸς ἥκων his messenger, [NT+5th c.BC+]; τεύχεα καλὰ φέρουσα παρ᾽ Ἡφαίστοιο from his workshop, [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

παρά

para

a primary preposition; properly, near; i.e. (with genitive case) from

beside (literally or figuratively), (with dative case) at (or in) the

vicinity of (objectively or subjectively), (with accusative case) to

the proximity with (local (especially beyond or opposed to) or causal

(on account of):--above, against, among, at, before, by, contrary to,

X friend, from, + give (such things as they), + that (she) had,

X his, in, more than, nigh unto, (out) of, past, save,

side...by, in the sight of, than, (there-)fore, with. In compounds it

retains the same variety of application.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παρά

Prep.

from, in the presence of

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παρά para 194x

(1) gen., from, indicating source or origin, Mt. 2:4, 7; Mk. 8:11; Lk. 2:1; οἱ παρ’ αὐτοῦ, his relatives or kinsmen, Mk. 3:21; τὰ παρ’ αὐτῆς πάντα, all her substance, property, etc., Mk. 5:26. (2) dat., with, in, among, etc., Mt. 6:1; 19:26; 21:25; 22:25; παρ’ ἑαυτῷ, at home, 1 Cor. 16:2; in the sight of, in the judgment or estimation of, 1 Cor. 3:19; 2 Pet. 2:11; 3:8. (3) acc., motion, by, near…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παρά from the side of, c. gen., beside, alongside of, c. dat., to the side of, motion alongside of, c. acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radical sense beside:

WITH GENIT. from the side of, from beside: from, φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος παρὰ μηροῦ Il.

commonly of Persons, ἦλθε πὰρ Διός id. Il.; ἀγγελίη ἥκει παρὰ βασιλῆος Hdt.; ὁ παρά τινος ἥκων his messenger, Xen.

issuing from a person, γίγνεσθαι παρά τινος to be born from him, Plat.; when it follows a Noun, a particip. may be supplied, ἡ παρὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων δόξα glory from (given by) men, id. Plat.; τὸ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἀδίκημα done by me, Xen.; παρ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ διδόναι to give from oneself, i. e. from one's own means, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
36%from
from36% · 71×with21% · 40×by7% · 13×at5% · 9×beside5% · 9×contrary to3% · 6×beyond3% · 6×than3% · 6×other renderings18% · 35×

195 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial84%predicate7%object5%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 192 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰμίI am, existἀκούωI hear, listenδαπανάωI spend, bear ex
αὐτός
ῥίπτωI throw, cast, tγίνομαιI come into beinλέγωI say, speak
εἰμίI am, exist
ἀδύνατοςincapable, imposκαίand, even, also,ἸουδαῖοςJewish
ἀκούωI hear, listen
ὅςArticle the
τὶς
βραχύςshort, littleἔρχομαιI come, goπροσδοκάωI expect, await
παράfrom192×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godπατήρfather, Father, ὁδόςa way, road, jou
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oποῦIrg
σύ
μένωI remain, abideεἰμίI am, existἐξέρχομαιI go out, come o
ἐγώ
Article theἑπτάIndecπίνωI drink, imbibe
θεόςGod, a god
πατήρfather, Father, πᾶςall, the whole, καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαρά · 192× in the New Testament
John Acts Luke Matthew Mark Romans Hebrews 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy Galatians James 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.5c. AD 100

ὁμοίως περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ λέγει Δανιήλ: Καὶ εἶδον τὸ τέταρτον θηρίον τὸ πονηρὸν καὶ ἰσχυρὸν καὶ χαλεπώτερον παρὰ πάντα τὰ θηρία τῆς θαλάσσης, καὶ ὡς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἀνέτειλεν δέκα κέρατα, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μικρὸν κέρας παραφυάδιον, καὶ ὡς ἐταπείνωσεν ὑφ̓ ἓν τρία…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Νεχούτης Σχώτου τοῦ Φιμήνιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν νε

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Μεσορὴ ε ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ὠνή. ἀπέδοτο Πανοβχοῦνις Παοῦτος Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν ξ μέσος μελίχρως

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
ἐμοῦegō Me G1473 Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · singular
2,567× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a pronoun meaning I or me, used by the speaker to refer to themselves. It is often used in the Bible to emphasize the speaker's identity.
Tyndale gloss
I/we
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The first-person pronoun. A Greek verb already carries its person in the ending, so the pronoun is usually present for emphasis. Luke puts himself inside the “us” among whom these things were fulfilled: he writes as one of the people the events happened to, not as an observer standing outside them.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,

pers. pron.

I.

The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Lk 3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mt 10:16, Jo 10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. I Ki 3:8), Ac 9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jo 1:23 (LXX), Ac 7:32 (LXX).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐγώ (egō) — I/we.

ἐγώ,

I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγώ

ego

a primary pronoun of the first person I (only expressed when

emphatic):--I, me. For the other cases and the plural see 1691, 1698,

1700, 2248, 2249, 2254, 2257, etc.

see GREEK for 1691

see GREEK for 1698

see GREEK for 1700

see GREEK for 2248

see GREEK for 2249

see GREEK for 2254

see GREEK for 2257

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐγώ

Pers.pr.

I

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγώ egō 2x

I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐγώ

pron. of the first person, Lat ego

epic ἐγών before vowels

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-1GS — Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · singular
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-1GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Genitive Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
47%i myself
i myself47% · 406×me myself21% · 180×me13% · 114×myself4% · 36×mine4% · 36×my3% · 26×i myself also3% · 26×other renderings5% · 42×

866 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 25 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject30%object26%adverbial26%indirect object10%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,567 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
πατήρfather, Father, ance
Article theθεόςGod, a godκαίand, even, also,
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
Article theναίDisjδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
μένωI remain, abideεἰμίI am, existπατήρfather, Father,
καίand, even, also, nam
ὡςas, like as, howαὐτόςοὕτωthus, so, in thi
δίδωμιI offer, give
ὅςArticle theαὐτός
ἐγώMe2567×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godπατήρfather, Father, ἐν
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theσύοὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,σύ
ἐν
Article theΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
οὐNegλέγωI say, speakArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐγώ · 2,567× in the New Testament
John Acts Luke Matthew 2 Corinthians Romans Mark 1 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews Galatians Philippians

18 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 853 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 17c. AD 40

ᾗ δὲ συνέστηκεν, εἰσόμεθα παρακολουθήσαντες εἰκόνι τινὶ τῶν παρ’ ἡμῖν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

συνγενόμενοι Ὥρωι Ψεν … λειτουργῶι μέχρι τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

σφραγίδων, ἧς ἐτελειώθη ὠνῆς ἀποστασίου ἐν τῷ ιδ ἔτει Φαῶφι ι εἰς τὸ ἐνλιπὸν μοι ἄπρατον γῆς ἀρουρῶν γ, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Κολλούθην μήδʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ

P.Cair. Goodspeed 9Pathyris100 BC–99 BC

παρὰ Πατῆτος τοῦ Πανεβχώνιος. ἐκμισθωθείσης μοι τῆς νήσου καλουμένης Περχμασσινηιτ εἰς τὸ ιϛ ἔτος πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα πέντε γίνονται πυροῦ

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
χρυσίον gold G5553
13× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Gold refers to a valuable metal or a golden article, like the gold plating in 1 Corinthians 3:12. This word can describe gold coins, ornaments, or other valuable items. It is often used to talk about wealth and value.
Amplified meaning
precious, refined metal
Tyndale gloss
gold
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

χρυσίον is a diminutive form of χρυσός, meaning a piece of gold or gold in general. It encompasses various uses, including gold coins, ornaments, and articles made of gold. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts related to both material wealth and adornment, such as in 1 Peter 1:7 and Revelation 21:18. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

χρυσίον, -ου, τό

(dimin. of χρυσός, q.v.),

[in LXX chiefly for זָהָב ;]

a piece of gold, gold: I Co 3:12, He 9:4, I Pe 1:7, Re 3:18 21:18, 21; of golden ornaments, I Ti 2:9 (WH, txt., RV), I Pe 3:3, Re 17:4 18:16 (WH, txt., R); of gold coin, money, Ac 3:6 20:33, I Pe 1:18.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

χρυσίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ypucos, cf. φορτίον), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for 37%, gold, both that which lies imbedded in the earth and is dug out of it (Plat. Euthyd. p. 288 e. ; Sept. Gen. ii. 11; hence μεταλλευθέν, Leian. de sacr. 11) : xp: πεπυρωμένον ex πυρός, [R. V. refined by fire], Rev. iii. 18; and that which has been smelted and wrought, Heb. ix. 4; [1 Co. iii.12 T Tr WH]; 1 Pet. i. 7; Rev. xxi. 18,21; i. q. gold coin, ‘gold’: Acts iii. 6; xx. 33; 1 Pet. i. 18; golden ornaments, precious things made of gold, 1 Tim. ii. 9 L WH txt.; 1 Pet. iii. 3; Rev. xvii. 4 GLWHtxt.; xviii. 16 GL Trtxt. WH txt. (cf. χρυσός.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

χρυσίον, “gold,” is used of (a) ‘‘gold coin,” as in Ac 35 a/., in P Cairo Zen III. 593517 (B.c. 243) χρυσίου δραχμὰς v, ‘four hundred drachmae of gold,” P Oxy II. 259! (a.p. 23) τῶν χρυσίων μν[α]ιήων δύο, ‘‘two minae of gold.” (4) ‘‘gold ornaments,” as in 1 Pet 3%, in P Michigan Inv. No. 1367% (iii/A.D.) (=/ourn. of Egypt. Arch. xiii. Ρ. 62) veykov ἐρχομένη σου τὰ χρυσία ἀλλὰ μὴ αὐτὰ φορέσῃς ἐν τῷ πλο[(]ῳ, “when you come bring your gold ornaments, but do not wear them in the boat,” P Oxy X. 127378 (A.D. 260) Ta μὲν χρυσία, the gold objects of a dowry. , χρυσοδακτύλιος, ““wearing a gold ring,” does not seem to occur except ἢ Jas 25, but cf. the similar use of χρυσόχειρ in Lucian 77. 20, and Epict. i. 22. 18 γέρων πολιὸς χρυσοῦς δακτυλίους ἔχων…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

χρυσίον (chrusion) — gold.

χρῡσίον, τό,

diminutive of χρυσός, a piece of gold, generally, gold, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. anything made of gold, gold plate, ornaments of gold, etc., ἄσημον [NT+5th c.BC+]

3. especially gold coin, money, [Refs 5th c.BC+]pieces of gold, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

4. gold thread, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. as a term of endearment, my little treasure! [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. ={τὸ τῶν παιδίων αἰδοῖον}, [Refs 5th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

χρυσίον

chrusion

diminutive of 5557; a golden article, i.e. gold plating, ornament, or

coin:--gold.

see GREEK for 5557

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

χρυσίον, ου, τό

n.n.

a golden ornament

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

χρυσίον chrysion 12x

gold, Heb. 9:4; 1 Pet. 1:7; Rev. 3:18; 21:18, 21; spc. gold when coined or manufactured; golden ornaments, 1 Tim. 2:9; 1 Pet. 3:3; Rev. 17:4; 18:16; gold coin, money, Acts 3:6; 20:33; 1 Pet. 1:18*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

χρυσίον χρυ_σίον, ου, τό, Dim. of χρύσος a piece of gold, generally, gold, Hdt., Thuc., etc.; pl., Dem.

gold coin, money, Eur., Ar., Plat., etc.; χρυσία pieces of gold, Plat.

as a term of endearment, my golden one! my little treasure! Ar., Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

gold (zahabh; chrusos):

1. Terms:

No metal has been more frequently mentioned in Old Testament writings than gold, and none has had more terms applied to it. Among these terms the one most used is zahabh. The Arabic equivalent, dhahab, is still the common name for gold throughout Palestine, Syria and Egypt. With zahabh frequently occur other words which, translated, mean "pure" (Ex 25:11), "refined" (1Ch 28:18), "finest" (1Ki 10:18), "beaten" (1Ki 10:17), "Ophir" (Ps 45:9).

Other terms occurring are: paz, "fine gold" (Job 28:17;

Gold

(1.) Heb. zahab, so called from its yellow colour (Ex. 25:11; 1 Chr. 28:18; 2 Chr. 3:5).

(2.) Heb. segor, from its compactness, or as being enclosed or treasured up; thus precious or “fine gold” (1 Kings 6:20; 7:49).

(3.) Heb. paz, native or pure gold (Job 28:17; Ps. 19:10; 21:3, etc.).

(4.) Heb. betzer, “ore of gold or silver” as dug out of the mine (Job 36:19, where it means simply riches).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

Gold was known from the very earliest times. (Genesis 2:11) It was at first used chiefly for ornaments, etc. (Genesis 24:22) Coined money was not known to the ancients till a comparatively late period; and on the Egyptian tombs gold is represented as being weighed in rings for commercial purposes. Comp. (Genesis 43:21) Gold was extremely abundant in ancient times, (1 Chronicles 22:14; 2 Chronicles 1:15; 9:9; Daniel 3:1; Nahum 2:9) but this did not depreciate its value, because of the enormous quantities consumed by…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A well-known valuable metal, found in many parts of the world, and obtained anciently in Ophir, Job 28:16; Parvaim, 2Ch 3:6; Sheba, and Raamah, Eze 27:22. Job alludes to gold in various forms, Job 22:24 28:15-19. Abraham was rich in it, and female ornaments were early made of it, Ge 13:2 24:22,35. It is spoken of throughout Scripture; and the use of it among and ancient Hebrews, in its native and mixed state, and for the same purposes as at present, was very common. The Ark of the Covenant was overlaid with pure gold; the mercy seat, the vessels and utensils belonging to the tabernacle, and those also of the house of…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
92%gold
gold92% · 11×than gold8% · 1×

12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial39%object23%predicate23%subject15%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 13 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀργύριονsilver, a shekelπλέγμαbraided hair, an
Disj
ἀργύριονsilver, a shekel
πόλιςa city
Article the
θεμέλιοςbelonging to the fou
Article the
πάντοθενfrom all sides
περικαλύπτωI cover up
χρυσίονgold13×
what comes after →
Disj
ἱματισμόςraiment, clothinμαργαρίτηςa pearlἔνδυσιςa putting on of
καίand, even, also, nam
λίθοςa stone
καθαρόςclean, pure, unstain
ὅμοιοςlike, similar toὡςas, like as, how
οὐNeg
ὑπάρχωI am, exist, am
ἀργύριονsilver, a shekel, mo
λίθοςa stone

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceχρυσίον · 13× in the New Testament
Revelation 1 Peter Acts 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy Hebrews
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 152 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.63c. AD 40

οὗτος ὁ κυκλῶν πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν Εὐιλάτ, ἐκεῖ οὗ ἐστι τὸ χρυσίον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.103c. AD 75–95

ἔριά τε τοῖς προειρημένοις ἄνθεσι μεμολυσμένα καὶ λίνου βύσσον λίθους τε τούτοις ἐνδεδεμένους, οὓς χρυσίῳ καθειργνύντες ἄνθρωποι κόσμῳ χρῶνται πολυτελεῖ, θυμιαμάτων τε πλῆθος συνέφερον·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 4.3.4c. AD 140

ὥσπερ γὰρ τὸ χρυσίον δοκιμάζεται διὰ τοῦ πυρὸς καὶ εὔχρηστον γίνεται, οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς δοκιμάζεσθε οἱ κατοικοῦντες ἐν αὐτοῖς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 4th c. AD 8th c. AD
P.Hamb. 3 220Ptolemais Euergetis (?) (Arsinoites)AD 223–AD 224

ἔχειν παρʼ αὐτῆς ἐφʼ ἑαυτῇ ἅμα τῇ τοῦ γάμου συμβιώσει φερνὴν διὰ χειρὸς χρυσίου καθαροῦ μναιαῖα ὀκτὼ ἐν κοσμαρίοις, ἅ ἐστιν … … … τῶν λοιπῶν μναιαίων δύο

ÉdP 5 (1939), p. 87-Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 297

, καὶ ἐν τούτῳ προχωρήσαντος αὐτῇ ἔπειτα προηνέγκατο ὡς χρεωστεῖται αὐτῇ ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς χρυσίον μναιαῖον ἕν . διά τε μεσιτῶν φήσασα καὶ τοῦτο εὖγʼ ἀποδεικτὸν μὴ καταστήσασα, νῦν

P.Cair. Isid. 89Karanis? (Arsinoites)AD 308

καὶ ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτοῖς πάντων καθάπερ ἐκ δίκης, ὅπερ ἀργύριον ἐχώρησεν εἰς συνωνὴν χρυσίου καὶ ἀσήμου ὑπὲρ τῆς ἑαυτῶν κτήσεως εἰς τὴν θείαν ἐπιβολήν, καὶ ἐπερωτηθέντες ὡμολόγησαν. Αὐρήλιοι

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
πεπυρωμένονpuroō refined G4448 Verb · perfect · passive · participle · accusative · singular · neuter
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To burn means to set something on fire or be ignited. In Ephesians 6:16, it describes being protected from fiery darts. It can also mean being refined or purified like metals in a fire.
Tyndale gloss
to burn
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πυρόω refers to the act of burning or being set on fire, often used in a metaphorical sense to describe emotions like grief, anger, or lust. In the New Testament, it appears in passive forms, indicating a state of being ignited or inflamed, as seen in Eph 6:16 and 2 Cor 11:29. The word also relates to the refinement of metals, as noted in Rev 3:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πυρόω, -ῶ

(< πῦρ),

[in LXX chiefly for צרף;]

to set on fire, burn up. In NT always pass.,

to be set on fire, to burn: Eph 6:16, II Pe 3:12; ptcp., glowing, Re 1:15. Metaph., of grief or indignation, II Co 11:29; of lust, I Co 7:9.

Of metals (cf. Jb 22:25, Ps 11 (12):7, Za 13:9), to be refined or purified by fire: Re 3:18 (and so in RV, Re 1:15, but v. supr.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πυρόω: Pass., pres. mupoduar; pf. ptep. πεπυρωμένος ; (rip); fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down; to burn with fire, to set on fire, to kindle; in the N. T. it is used only in the pass. a. to be on fire, to burn: prop. 2 Pet. iii. 12; trop. of the heat of the passions: of grief, 2 Co. xi. 29 [Eng. Versions burn (often understood of indignation, but cf. Meyer); W. 153 (145)]; of anger, with τοῖς θυμοῖς added, i. 4. to be incensed, indignant, 2 Mace. iv. 38; x. 35; xiv. 45; to be inflamed with se xual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. b. pf. ptep. πεπυρωμέvos, made to glow [R. V. refined]: Rev. i. 15 [(ef. B. 80 (69) n.)]; full of fire; fiery, ignited: τὰ βέλη τὰ πεπ. darts filled with inflammable substances and set on fire, Eph. vi. 16 (Apollod. bibl. 2, 5, 2 § 3); melted by fire and purged of dross: χρυσίον πεπυρ. ἐκ πυρός, [refined by fire], Rev. iii. 18 (so πυρόω in the Sept. for \1¥; as τὸ ἀργύριον, Job…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πυρόω, “‘burn with fire,’ occurs in a Jewish-Greek sepulch: inscr. from Tell el Yehudieh, ZV7W xxii. (1923), p. 2 No. 18° πατὴρ kal μήτηρ οἱ πυρώμενοι ἐννεαέτην, whe Lietzmann thinks the reference is to ‘‘ burning” the de body, and not to the parents’ ‘‘ burning with grief’’ ( 2 Cor 1139). In the same list of inscrr. we find No. 2 τρεῖς ὧδε π]άρεσμεν, ὁ ἀνὴρ Kal [ἡ θυγάτηρ Kal [π]επύρωκαν ἐγώ.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πυρόω (puroō) — to burn.

πῠρόω,

(πῦρ) burn with fire, burn up, τὰς Ἀθήνας [Refs 5th c.BC+]; burn as a burnt sacrifice, ὀσφῦν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; burn on a pyre, ἣν πεπύρωκαν (sic) ἐγώ [Refs]; π. Κύκλωπος ὄψιν burn out his eye, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —middle, παῖδα πυρωσαμένη having placed my son on the pyre, [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—passive, to be set on fire, to be burnt, πυρωθέντων Τρώων [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__b π. τὴν γεῦσιν, τὴν γλῶσσαν, seem hot to the taste or tongue, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

__c ἡ ζεστολουσία.. πυροῦσα τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν reddening or warming up the surface, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

2. metaphorically, set on fire, inflame, Ἔρως σὺ δ᾽ εὐθέως με πύρωσον [Refs]:—passive, to be inflamed or excited, παραγγέλμασιν.. πυρωθεὶς καρδίαν [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πυρόω

puroo

from 4442; to kindle, i.e. (passively) to be ignited, glow

(literally), be refined (by implication), or (figuratively) to be

inflamed (with anger, grief, lust):--burn, fiery, be on fire, try.

see GREEK for 4442

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πυρόω

v.

I burn, am purified by fire

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πυρόω pyroō 6x

to set on fire, burn; pass. to be kindled, be on fire, burn, flame, Eph. 6:16; 2 Pet. 3:12; Rev. 1:15; met. to fire with distressful feelings, 2 Cor. 11:29; of lust, to be inflamed, burn, 1 Cor. 7:9; to be tried with fire, as metals, Rev. 3:18*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πυρόω πυ^ρόω, φυτ. -ώσω πῦρ to burn with fire, burn up, Hdt., Soph.: to burn as a burnt sacrifice, Aesch., Eur.; π. Κύκλωπος ὄψιν to burn out his eye, Eur.:—Mid., παῖδα πυρωσαμένη having placed one's son on the pyre, Anth.:—Pass. to set on fire, to be burnt, Pind., Eur.

metaph. in Pass. to be inflamed or excited, Aesch.

Pass. also, of gold, to be proved or tested by fire, NTest.

to fumigate, Theocr.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-RPP-ASN — Verb · perfect · passive · participle · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-RPP-ASN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%refined
refined33% · 2×burn with passion17% · 1×do burn inwardly?17% · 1×enflamed17% · 1×being set on fire17% · 1×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb83%adverbial17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Disj
γαμέωI marry
ἐγώ
οὐNeg
Article the
πονηρόςevil, bad, wicke
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaven
ὅς
κάμινοςa furnace
ἐν
πυρόωrefined
what comes after →
σβέννυμιI extinguish, suppre
λύωI loose, untie, rele
καίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article the
ἐκ
πῦρfire, trials

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπυρόω · 6× in the New Testament
Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians 2 Peter Ephesians
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Sacrifices of Abel and Cain 87c. AD 40

ὅταν οὖν „νέα" τὴν ἀκμὴν καὶ „πεφρυγμένα„ τὸν πεπυρωμένον καὶ ἀνίκητον λόγον καὶ „χίδρα„ τὴν τομὴν καὶ διαίρεσιν τῶν πραγμάτων καὶ „ἐρικτὰ„ τὴν τριβὴν καὶ μελέτην τῶν ἐπινοηθέντων ὁμολογῇς κατὰ θεόν, πρωτογεννημάτων οἴσεις θυσίαν, ὧν πρώτων καὶ…

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
ἐκek by G1537 Preposition
913× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The preposition 'out from' shows movement or origin, like in John 6:31 and Acts 9:3. It helps us understand where people or things come from or are going.
Tyndale gloss
out from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκ (ἐξ),

prep. c. gen.,

from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,

prep. c. gen.,

of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.

Of Place,

of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jo 6:31, Ac 9:3, Ga 1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mt 8:28 17:9, Mk 1:25 7:28, Jo 1:33 20:1, Ac 12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας.) ἐκ, Ju 5, Ac 28:4. Metaph., Mt 7:4, 5, I Pe 2:9; ἐκ τ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκ (ek) — out from.

ἐκ,

before a vowel ἐξ, also

__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.

__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:

__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκ

ek

or ex ex

a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or

motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or

figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,

betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),

for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X

heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,

off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,

through,

X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,

with the same general import; often of completion.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκ, ἐξ

Prep.

from out, out from among, from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκ ek 915x

ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκ

ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:

out of, from. c. gen.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.

to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.

to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.

of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.

with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

In the sense of "against" which survives only in dialectal English (compare Wright, Dialect Dict., I, 470, for examples) is the King James Version rendering of the dative emauto of 1Co 4:4 (the American Standard Revised Version renders this "against"). In classical Greek the same idiom sunoida with dative = "be conscious" or "be cognizant of" a thing.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

By

In the expression “by myself” (A.V., 1 Cor. 4:4), means, as rendered in the Revised Version, “against myself.”

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%of
of28% · 258×from26% · 243×out of23% · 216×out from7% · 61×by5% · 51×at2% · 20×other renderings8% · 70×other renderings1% · 14×

933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial69%predicate15%subject11%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becἀνάστασιςa rising again,
αὐτός
ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, ἀνίστημιI raise up, set καταβαίνωI go down, come
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegArticle theτίςIrg
εἷςone
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becαὐτός
ἐκby913×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaθεόςGod, a godστόμαthe mouth, speec
αὐτός
εἰμίI am, existArticle theκαίand, even, also,
νεκρόςdead, a corpse
ἀνίστημιI raise up, set ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, καίand, even, also,
σύ
παραδίδωμιI hand over, delμεριμνάωI am anxious, diἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
πίστιςfaith, belief, trust
ζάωI liveἸησοῦςJesusἀλλάbut, except

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκ · 913× in the New Testament
John Revelation Luke Acts Matthew Mark Romans Galatians 1 Corinthians 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
πυρὸςpur fire G4442 Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
71× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Fire, literally or figuratively, is used in the Bible to describe flames, lightning, or God's judgment. It appears in Matthew 13:40 and Revelation 8:5. Jesus teaches about fire in Luke 3:9 and John 15:6.
Amplified meaning
purified, tested
Tyndale gloss
fire
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πῦρ, gen. πυρός, is a Greek noun meaning 'fire.' It appears frequently in the New Testament, often symbolizing divine judgment or trials, as seen in verses like Mark 9:22 and 1 Corinthians 3:13. The word can also refer to hellfire, with specific references in Matthew 18:8 and Revelation 20:10. It has metaphorical uses, such as describing the tongue in James 3:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πῦρ, gen., πυρός, τό,

[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for אֵשׁ;]

fire: Mk 9:22, Lk 3:9, Jo 15:6, Ac 2:19, I Co 3:13, Ja 3:5, Re 8:5, al; π. καὶ θεῖον, Lk 17:29; κατακαίειν (ἐν) π., Mt 13:40, Re 17:16 18:8; καίεσθαι πυρί, He 12:18, Re 8:8 21:8; φλὸξ πυρός, Ac 7:30, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πῦρ, gen. πυρός, τό, [prob. fr. Skr. pu ‘to purify’ (cf. Germ. feuer); Vaniéek p. 541; Curtius § 385], fr. Hom. down; Hebr. wx; fire: Mt. iii. 10, 12; vii.19; xvii. 15; Mk. ix. 22; Lk. iii. 9,17; ix. 54; Jn. xv.6; Actsii. 19; xxviii. 5; 1 Co. iii. 13; Heb. xi. 34; Jas. 111. 5; v. 3; Rev. Cob OAS ths 17. 18. sau Bie ἈΠ|:15.; Sahig 8» Soe PIF Sap 8; xx. 9; ἅπτειν πῦρ, to kindle a fire, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr txt. WH περιάπτ.]; ἔβρεξε πῦρ καὶ θεῖον, Lk. xvii. 29; κατακαίειν τι ev ['T om. WH br. ἐν] πυρί, Rev. xvii. 16; xvili. 8; καίομαι πυρί, Mt. xiii. 40 [R LT WH κατακ.]; Heb. xii. 18 [W. § 31, 7 d.]; Rev. viii. 8; xxi. 8; φλὸξ πυρός, a fiery flame or flame of fire, Acts vii. 30; 2 Th. i. 8 Ltxt. Trtxt.; Heb. i. 7; Rev. i.14; ii.18; xix. 12, (Ex. iii. 2 cod. Alex.; Is. xxix.6); mip φλογός, a flaming fire or fire of flame, 2 Th. i.8 RGLmrg. T Trmre. WH (Ex. iii. 2 cod. Vat.; Sir. xlv. 19)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πῦρ (pur) — fire.

πῦρ

(once πύυρ [?~X ¯ ?~X] by 'distraction', [Refs 4th c.BC+]; not used in plural, see at {πυρά},{τά}:—fire, π. καίειν or δαίειν to kindle fire, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. ἀνακαίειν, ἅπτειν, ἐξάπτειν, αἴθειν, ἐναύειν, (see entry).; π. ποιεῖν, ποιήσασθαι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. ἐμβαλεῖν νηυσί, κλισίῃσι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. φυσητέον, ῥιπίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__b π. τεχνικόν, see at {τεχνικός}.

2. funeral-fire (compare πυρά), ὄφρα πυρός με.. λελάχωσι θανόντα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ζῶντα διδόναι τινὰ πυρί burn one alive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. sacrificial fire, ἐν πυρὶ βάλλε θυηλάς [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πῦρ

pur

a primary word; "fire" (literally or figuratively, specially,

lightning):--fiery, fire.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πῦρ, πυρός, τό

n.n.

fire, trials

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πῦρ pyr 71x

fire, Mt. 3:10; 7:19; 13:40, et al. freq.; πυρός, used by Hebraism with the force of an adjective, fiery, fierce, Heb. 10:27; fire used figuratively to express various circumstances of severe trial, Lk. 12:49; 1 Cor. 3:13; Jude 23

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πῦρ not used in pl. v. πυρά fire, Hom., etc.; πῦρ καίειν or δαίειν to kindle fire, id. Hom.; πῦρ ἀνακαίειν, ἅπτειν, ἐξάπτειν, αἴθειν, ἐναύειν, v. sub vocc.; πῦρ ἐμβάλλειν νηυσί Il.

the funeral-fire (cf. πυρά), id. Il.

the fire of the hearth, πυρὶ δέχεσθαί τινα Eur.; π. ἄσβεστον or ἀθάνατον the fire of Vesta in the Prytaneion, Plut.

as a symbol of things irresistible or terrible, μάρναντο δέμας πυρὸς αἰθομένοιο they were fighting like burning fire, Il.; κρεῖσσον ἀμαιμακέτου πυρός Soph.; διὰ πυρὸς ἰέναι (as we say) to go through fire and water, Xen.; but, διὰ πυρὸς ἦλθε ἑτέρῳ λέκτρῳ she raged furiously against the other partner of the bed, Eur.:—of persons, ὦ πῦρ σύ Soph.:—rarely as an image of warmth and comfort…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

fir ('esh; pur):

These are the common words for fire, occurring very frequently. 'Ur, "light" (Isa 24:15 the King James Version; compare the Revised Version (British and American); Isa 31:9, and see FIRES), nur (Aramaic) (Da 3:22 ff) are found a few times, also 'eshshah (Jer 6:29), and be`erah (Ex 22:6), once each. Ac 28:2,3 has pura, "pyre," and Mr 14:54; Lu 22:56, phos, "light," the Revised Version (British and American) "in the light (of the fire)." "To set…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Fire

(1.) For sacred purposes. The sacrifices were consumed by fire (Gen. 8:20). The ever-burning fire on the altar was first kindled from heaven (Lev. 6:9, 13; 9:24), and afterwards rekindled at the dedication of Solomon’s temple (2 Chr. 7:1, 3). The expressions “fire from heaven” and “fire of the Lord” generally denote lightning, but sometimes also the fire of the altar was so called (Ex. 29:18; Lev. 1:9; 2:3; 3:5, 9).

Fire for a sacred purpose obtained otherwise than from the altar was called “strange fire” (Lev. 10:1, 2;

is represented as the symbol of Jehovah’s presence and the instrument of his power, in the way either of approval or of destruction. (Exodus 3:2; 14:19) etc. There could not be a better symbol for Jehovah than this of fire, it being immaterial, mysterious, but visible, warming, cheering, comforting, but also terrible and consuming. Parallel with this application of fire and with its symbolical meaning are to be noted the similar use for sacrificial purposes and the respect paid to it, or to the heavenly bodies as symbols of deity, which prevailed among so many nations of antiquity, and of which the traces are not even now extinct; e.g. the Sabean and Magian systems of worship. (Isaiah 27:9) Fire for sacred purposes obtained elsewhere than from the altar was called "strange fire," and for the use of such Nadab and Abihu were punished…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

In Scripture, is often connected with the presence of Jehovah; as in the burning bush, and on Mount Sinai, Ex 3:2 19:18 Ps 18:1-50 Hab 1:1-3:19. The second coming of Christ will be "in flaming fire," 2Th 1:8. In the New Testament it illustrates the enlightening, cheering, and purifying agency of the Holy Spirit, Mt 3:11 Ac 2:3. By sending fire from heaven to consume sacrifices, God often signified his acceptance of them: as in the case of Abel, Ge 4:4; Abraham, Ge…

Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 246 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 146c. AD 40

συγκέκραται γὰρ ἐκ τῶν αὐτῶν, γῆς καὶ ὕδατος καὶ ἀέρος καὶ πυρός, ἑκάστου τῶν στοιχείων εἰσενεγκόντος τὸ ἐπιβάλλον μέρος πρὸς ἐκπλήρωσιν αὐταρκεστάτης ὕλης, ἣν ἔδει λαβεῖν τὸν δημιουργόν, ἵνα τεχνιτεύσῃ τὴν ὁρατὴν ταύτην εἰκόνα·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.70c. AD 75–95

ὑπὲρ δὲ τοῦ μὴ διαφυγεῖν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τὰ ηὑρημένα μηδὲ πρὶν εἰς γνῶσιν ἐλθεῖν φθαρῆναι, προειρηκότος ἀφανισμὸν Ἀδάμου τῶν ὅλων ἔσεσθαι τὸν μὲν κατʼ ἰσχὺν πυρὸς τὸν ἕτερον δὲ κατὰ βίαν καὶ πλῆθος ὕδατος, στήλας δύο ποιησάμενοι τὴν μὲν ἐκ πλίνθου…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 11.1c. AD 96

Διὰ φιλοξενίαν καὶ εὐσέβειαν Λὼτ ἐσώθη ἐκ Σοδόμων, τῆς περιχώρου πάσης κριθείσης διὰ πυρὸς καὶ θείου, πρόδηλον ποιήσας ὁ δεσπότης, ὅτι τοὺς ἐλπίζοντας ἐπ’ αὐτὸν οὐκ ἐγκαταλείπει, τοὺς δὲ ἑτεροκλινεῖς ὑπάρχοντας εἰς κόλασιν καὶ αἰκισμὸν τίθησιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 1st c. BC
P.Köln 3 14731 BC–AD 15

τριβῆς καὶ σήψεως, πλὴν ἐὰν μή τι βίαιον ἐκ θεοῦ γένηται κατὰ χειμῶνα ἢ πυρὸς ἀπὸ γῆς πάθῃ τὸ πλοῖον ἢ ὑπὸ πολεμίων ἢ λῃστῶν περισπασθῇ ὃ καὶ συμφανὲς

P.Amh. 2 133HermopolitesAD 90–AD 133

χλωρῶν οὔπω οὐδέν. παρακαλῶ σε γράψαι μοι περὶ τῆς ὑγιείας σου. οὐ προχωρεῖ ὁ πυρὸς εἰ μὴ ἐκ δραχμῶν ἑπτά . ἔρρωσο καὶ παρακληθεὶς συνεχῶς ἡμῖν γράφε περὶ τῆς

P.Stras. 4 267Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 126–AD 128

μὲν φοίνικας ἀπὸ συνκομιδῆς καρπῶν, τὸ δὲ ἔδαφος ἀπὸ συγκομιδῆς τῶν σπαρησομένων, τὸν δὲ πυρ… … … … ἐὰν φαίνηται μισθῶσαι ἐπὶ τούτοις

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
ἵναhina so that G2443 Conjunction
669× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'in order that' or 'to', showing purpose or result, as seen in Acts 19:4 and Romans 11:31. It's used to express a goal or outcome. In Ephesians 1:17, it's used to describe a purpose.
Tyndale gloss
in order that/to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἵνα is primarily a conjunction meaning 'in order that' or 'that,' indicating purpose or intention. It can also function as an adverb of place, meaning 'where' or 'whither.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often introducing clauses that express purpose, such as in Matthew 1:22. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings or usages.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἵνα,

adverb (poët., Hom., al.),

of place, where, whither.

of circumstance, when.

Conjunction,

prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Ac 19:4, Ro 11:31 (?), Ga 2:10, al.);

c. optat. (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph 1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; v. Burton, § 225, Rem., 2);

c. subjc.: after a pres., Mk 4:21, Lk 6:34, Jo 3:15, Ac 2:25,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 186 sqq-.) thought he had found two examples in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have leatned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the second, iva αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. “ iva I. a final Conjunction (for from local direction, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy te mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα pn, that not, lest; it is used…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἵνα (hina) — in order that/to.

ἵνα,

adverb,

I. of Place,

I.1. in that place, there, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.2. elsewhere relative, in which place, where,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵ. ἡ Νίκη (i.e. ἐστίν) [Refs 8th c.BC+] [same place]; ἵν᾽ ἄν with subjunctive, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as indirect interrogative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. b after [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔμαθε ἵ. ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵν᾽ ἕσταμεν χρείας[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. c with Verbs of motion, whither, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. of circumstance, γάμος.., ἵ. χρή at which, when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵ. μὲν ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς.., ἐνταῦθα.. when it was in their power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. ={ἐάν}, uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἵνα

hina

probably from the same as the former part of 1438 (through the

demonstrative idea; compare 3588); in order that (denoting the purpose

or the result):--albeit, because, to the intent (that), lest, so as,

(so) that, (for) to. Compare 3363.

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3363

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἵνα

Cj.

in order that, so that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἵνα hina 663x

that, in order that, Mt. 19:13; Mk. 1:38; Jn. 1:22; 3:15; 17:1; ἵνα μή, that not, lest, Mt. 7:1; in NT equivalent to ὥστε, so that, so as that, Jn. 9:2; also, marking a simple circumstance, the circumstance that, Mt. 10:25; Jn. 4:34; 6:29; 1 Jn. 4:17; 5:3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἵνα Adverb,

of Place,

demonstr. in that place, there, only in Il. 10. 127.

relat., = ὅπου, in which place, where, Hdt., etc.;—so, ἵνα τε Il.; ἵνα περ Hom.:—c. gen., ἵνα γῆς in whatever part of the land, Hdt.; ἔμαθε ἵνα ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, id. Hdt.; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ Soph.

= ὅποι, with Verbs of motion, whither, Od.; ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ ἥκεις Soph.

of circumstance, when, at which, Od.

Final Conjunction, = ὅπως, that, in order that, Lat. ut, Hom.:

with subj.,

after principal tenses of ind., id. Hom., etc.

after historical tenses, in similes, where the aor. refers to any possible time, Od.

after opt. and ἄν, ἔδωκε μένος, ἵνα γένοιτο she gave him vigour, that he might become, Il.

with opt., after historical tenses, Hom., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

so (co', although the Hebrew might be pointed cewe'; Assyrian Sib'u; Septuagint Segor, Soa; Manetho, Seuechos; Latin Sevechus; Herodotus (ii. 137 ff), Sabakon): In all probability the "Sabaeo" of Herodotus, the Shabaka, who founded the Ethiopian dynasty, the XXVth of Egyptian kings. His date is given as 715-707 BC (Flinders Petrie, History of Egypt, III, 281 ff), but we may suppose that before his accession to the throne he was entitled to be designated king, as being actually regent. To this So, Hoshea, king of Israel, made an appeal for assistance to enable him to throw off the yoke of the Assyrian Shalmaneser IV (2Ki 17:3). But Hoshea's submission to So brought him no advantage, for Shalmaneser came up throughout all the land and laid siege to Samaria. Not long after the fall of Samaria, So ventured upon an eastern campaign, and…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

So

(Nubian, Sabako), an Ethiopian king who brought Egypt under his sway. He was bribed by Hoshea to help him against the Assyrian monarch Shalmaneser (2 Kings 17:4). This was a return to the policy that had been successful in the reign of Jeroboam I.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

"So, king of Egypt," is once mentioned in the Bible -- (2 Kings 17:4) So has been identified by different writers with the first and second kings of the Ethiopian twenty-fifth dynasty, called by Manetho, Sabakon (Shebek) and Sebichos (Shebetek).

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

King of Egypt, made an alliance with Hoshea king of Israel, and promised him assistance; but was unable to prevent Shalmaneser king of Assyria from taking Samaria and subverting the kingdom, B. C. 721, 2Ki 17:4. See PHARAOH.

So is believed to have been the Servetus or Sabaco II of secular history, the second king of the Ethiopian or twenty-fifth dynasty, and the predecessor of Trihakah. A singular fact has been brought to light by the recent explorations at Nineveh, corroborating the Scripture record the more forcibly, because unexpected and direct. The Bible shows that Egypt and Assyria, though remote, were often in conflict during the height of the Assyrian ruins power, and that So was at war with Shalmaneser. After war comes the treaty of peace; and as the Bible prepares us to suppose such treaties were made, the Assyrian ruins…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
56%that
that56% · 382×so that40% · 271×other renderings4% · 24×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial8%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 669 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
παρακαλέωI summon, entreaἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide,δίδωμιI offer, give
σύ
λαλέωI speak, sayδιάδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐγώ
δίδωμιI offer, giveὑπέρπερί
ἀλλάbut, except
αὐτόςκόσμοςthe world, univeἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
τίςIrgἐγώἱκανόςsufficient, wort
ἵναso that669×
what comes after →
μήNeg
Article theτὶςεἰς
Article the
γραφήa writing, passaχαράjoy, gladnessλόγοςa word, speech,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theσύαὐτός
ἐν
αὐτόςἐγώὅς
εἰμίI am, exist
μετάεἷςoneἅγιοςset apart, holy,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἵνα · 669× in the New Testament
John Mark 1 Corinthians Luke 2 Corinthians Revelation Matthew Romans Ephesians Hebrews 1 John Acts

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 300 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.71c. AD 75–95

ἵνα καὶ τῆς πλινθίνης ἀφανισθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἡ λιθίνη μείνασα παράσχῃ μαθεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα δηλοῦσα καὶ πλινθίνην ὑπʼ αὐτῶν ἀνατεθῆναι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Edg. $1Alexandria259 BC–257 BC

καὶ θεῶν μὴ ὀκνήσῃς διελθὼν εἰς ἐμπόριον καὶ ἀγοράσας, οὐθὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἡμᾶς ἐπικωλύει, ἵνα μὴ ὑστερήσωμεν τῆς ἐργασίας. τὰς δὲ τιμὰς τούτων λαβὲ παρὰ Ἀπολλοφάνους. τὸ γύναιον ἐπίτοκον

vestiges … ἵνα μηθὲν ἐν τούτοις ἀγνοηθῆι … … Ἑρμίαι τῶν διαδόχων καὶ ἐπιμελητῆι, παρὰ Δρύτωνος τοῦ

P.Bour. 11Pathyris89 BC

ἕκαστος τῶν παρὰ σοὶ σιτοποιησάμενος πυροῦ ἀρτάβην μίαν ἐν ἑτοίμωι ἔσται αὐτοῖς ὁ ἄρτος, ἵνα δὲ καὶ κριθὴ ὑπάρξηι ἐπιμε … … ηγησαιἐμμέτρως αἴτησαιἐμμε … … τησαι ἔρρωσο ἔτους

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
πλουτήσῃς,plouteō you may be rich, G4147 Verb · aorist · active · subjunctive · second person · singular
12× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be rich or wealthy is what this word means, like in Luke 1:53 where it talks about becoming rich. It can also mean being rich in faith, as in 1 Timothy 6:18, or having a lot of spiritual wealth.
Amplified meaning
spiritually wealthy, prosperous
Tyndale gloss
be rich
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πλουτέω (plouteo) means 'to be rich' or 'to become wealthy,' both literally and metaphorically. It appears in various contexts, such as gaining material wealth (Luke 1:53; 1 Timothy 6:9) or spiritual abundance (Romans 10:12). The word is derived from the root for wealth, πλοῦτος (ploutos), and can take different grammatical constructions, including genitive and dative. Notably, there are variations in usage across different lexicons, particularly regarding its metaphorical applications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πλουτέω, -ῶ,

[in LXX chiefly for עשׁר hi.;]

to be rich, aor., to become rich: Lk 1:53, I Ti 6:9; seq. ἀπό (Si 11:18), Re 18:15; ἐκ, Re 18:3, 19; ἐν (= cl., c. gen., dat., acc., cf. πλούσιος), I Ti 6:18. Metaph., π. εἰς θεόν, Lk 12:21; of God, εἰς πάντας, Ro 10:12; aor., I became rich, I Co 4:8, II Co 8:9, Re 3:18; pf., I have become rich, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πλουτέω, -@; 1 aor. ἐπλούτησα; pf. πεπλούτηκα; (πλοῦtos); fr. Hes. down; Sept. sometimes for wy; a. to be rich, to have abundance: prop. of outward possessions, absol., Lk. i. 53; 1 Tim. vi.9; 1 aor. 7 have been made rich, have become rich, have gotten riches (on this use of the aorist see βασιλεύω, fin.), ἀπό twos, Rev. xviii. 15 (Sir. xi. 18; [ef. ἀπό, II. 2.a.]) ; also ἔκ τινος (see ἐκ, II. 5), Rev. xviii. 3,19; ἔν τινι (cf. W. § 80, 8 b. note; the Greeks say πλουτεῖν τινος, Or τινι, OF TL), 1 Tim. vi. 18. b. metaph. to be richly supplied : πλουτεῖν εἰς πάντας, is affluent in resources so that he can give the blessings of salvation unto all, Ro. x. 12; πλουτεῖν eis θεόν (see εἰς, B. Il. 2 b.a.), Lk. xii. 21; aor. ἐπλούτησα, absolutely, I became rich, i. e. obtained the eternal spiritual possessions: 1 Co. iv. 8; 2 Co. viii. 9; Rev. iii. 18; πεπλούma, I have gotten riches, Rev. iii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πλουτέω. For the aor. = ‘‘ become rich,” as in Rev 318, cf. P Giss I. 1319 (not dated) ὅπω[ς] πλουτή[σ]ῃς εἰς αἰῶίνα. The aor. is ingressive in I Cor 4" ἤδη ἐπλουτήσατε; ‘have you already come into your wealth?” The pres. is seen in the Delphic precept, Sy//* 12681. °° πλούτει δ[ικαίως.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πλουτέω (plouteō) — be rich.

πλουτ-έω,

(πλοῦτος) to be rich, wealthy, opposed to πένομαι, τάχα σε ζηλώσει ἀεργὸς πλουτεῦντα [Refs 8th c.BC+]becomes rich, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; π. μέγα, μάλιστα, μεγάλως, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὄναρ πεπλουτηκέναι 'build castles in the air', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. ἀπὸ τῶν κοινῶν to be rich from the public purse, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. with genitive of things, to be rich in a thing, πόνου [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλουτῖον (i.e. -τεῖον, for the sake of meter for -τέον) τέκνων.. δωμάτιον [Refs]

3. with dative of things, π. ἐμπύροισιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σιδήρῳ, χαλκῷ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πλουτέω

plouteo

from 4148; to be (or become) wealthy (literally or figuratively):--be

increased with goods, (be made, wax) rich.

see GREEK for 4148

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πλουτέω

v.

I become rich

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πλουτέω plouteō 12x

to be or become rich, Lk. 1:25; 1 Tim. 6:9; trop. Lk. 12:21; met. to abound in, be abundantly furnished with, 1 Tim. 6:18; to be spiritually enriched, 2 Cor. 8:9

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πλουτέω πλουτέω, φυτ. -ήσω πλοῦτος to be rich, wealthy, Hes., Theogn., Hdt., attic; πλ. ἀπὸ τῶν κοινῶν to be rich from the public purse, Ar.

c. gen. rei, to be rich in a thing, Xen.

c. dat. rei, πλ. ἐμπύροισιν Eur., Xen.

c. acc. cogn., πλ. πλοῦτον Luc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAS-2S — Verb · aorist · active · subjunctive · second person · singular
aorist active subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAS-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Subjunctive Person: second Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
17%be rich
be rich17% · 2×enriched17% · 2×being rich17% · 2×rich8% · 1×you have been enriched8% · 1×may be enriched8% · 1×i have grown rich8% · 1×you may be rich8% · 1×other renderings8% · 1×

12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb83%object17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 12 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀγαθόςgoodεἰμίI am, exist
θεόςGod, a god
εἰς
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
κύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἤδηnow, already
εἰμίI am, exist
πτωχείαbeggary, poverty
ἐκεῖνος
πλουτέωyou may be rich,12×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐδείςno one, none, noἱμάτιονouter garment
ἐξαποστέλλωI send forth
κενόςempty, vain, hol
εἰς
πᾶςall, the whole,
χωρίςapart from, without
ἐγώ
ἐμπίπτωI fall in, am cast i
εἰς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπλουτέω · 12× in the New Testament
Revelation 1 Timothy Luke 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Romans
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaWho is the Heir of Divine Things 189c. AD 40

„ὁ πλουτῶν οὐ προσθήσει, καὶ ὁ πενόμενος οὐκ ἐλαττώσει ἀπὸ τοῦ ἡμίσους τοῦ διδράχμου“ (Exod.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 4.14c. AD 75–95

Κορῆς τις Ἑβραίων ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα καὶ γένει καὶ πλούτῳ διαφόρων ἱκανὸς δʼ εἰπεῖν καὶ δήμοις ὁμιλεῖν πιθανώτατος, ὁρῶν ἐν ὑπερβαλλούσῃ τιμῇ τὸν Μωυσῆν καθεστῶτα χαλεπῶς εἶχεν ὑπὸ φθόνου, καὶ γὰρ φυλέτης ὢν ἐτύγχανεν αὐτοῦ καὶ συγγενής, ἀχθόμενος ὅτι…

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 20.1c. AD 96

Ἀλλὰ μηδὲ ἐκεῖνο τὴν διάνοιαν ὑμῶν ταρασσέτω, ὅτι βλέπομεν τοὺς ἀδίκους πλουτοῦντας καὶ στενοχωρουμένους τοὺς τοῦ θεοῦ δούλους.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Giss. 1 13HermopolitesAD 116–AD 120

τριῶν … λ … λο … σσεν … πα … σα … ὅπως πλουτήσῃς εἰς αἰῶνα· θέλω … ς ὠνήσασθαι ταύτας καὶ βουλεύου δὲ περὶ τῶν ἐν Κούσσαις

O.Kellis 14Kellis (Oasis Magna)AD 252–AD 253

Ψάις υἱὸς Σουλ δραχμὰς β διώβολον· Πλούτων ἀδελφὸς δραχμὰς β διώβολον. Ἔτους γ Γάλλων. Αὐρήλιος Ἱέραξ ὁ καὶ Ἰνγενους ἄρχων δεκάπρωτος

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
ἱμάτιαhimation garments G2440 Noun · accusative · plural · neuter
60× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Clothing refers to the clothes we wear. In the Bible, it can be an outer garment like a cloak or mantle, as seen in Matthew 9:16 and 20-21. It's what we put on our bodies.
Amplified meaning
pure, spotless clothing
Tyndale gloss
clothing
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἱμάτιον (himation) refers to an outer garment or cloak, derived from the word for clothing, εἷμα. It is used in the New Testament to describe various types of garments, often contrasting with the inner tunic, χιτών. Key verses include Matthew 5:40 and Mark 5:27. The plural form can refer to garments in general.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἱμάτιον, -ου, τό

(dim. of εἷμα, a garment),

[in LXX chiefly for בֶּגֶד, also for שִׂמְלָה, שַׂלְמָה, etc.;]

a garment, but in usage always (exc. in p1., v. infr.) of an outer garment, a mantle, cloak (thrown over the χιτών; v. Rutherford, NPhr., 22; DCG, i, 499a): Mt 9:16, 20, 21, Mk 2:21 5:27, 28, 30, Jo 19:2, Ac 12:8, al.; opp. to χιτών, Mt 5:40, Lk 6:29, Ac 9:39; pl., garments, clothes (i.e. the cloak and the tunic), Mt 17:2 26:65 27:31, 35,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἱμάτιον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of tua i. 4. εἷμα, an article of clothing, garment; and this fr. ἔννυμι to clothe, cf. Germ. Hemd); [fr. Hdt. down]; Sept. mostly for 733, also for τ γον, 705, ete.; 1. a garment (of any sort): Mt. ix. 16; xi. 8 [RG Lbr., al. om.; ef. W. 591 (550) ; B. 82 (72)]; Mk. ii. 21; xv. 20; Lk. v. 36; vii. 25; Heb. i. 11; plur. garments, i. e. the cloak or mantle and the tunic [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (23)]: Mt. xvii. 2; xxiv. 18 [Rec.]; xxvii. 31,35; Jn. xix. 23; Acts vii. 58; Jas. vy. 2, ete.; to rend ra ip. (see διαρρήγνυμι), Mt. xxvi. 65; Acts xiv. 14; xxii. 23. 2. the upper garment, the cloak or mantle (which was thrown over the tunic, 6 χιτών) (Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 22]: Mt. ix. 20; [xxiv. 18 LT Tr WH]; Mk. v. 27; Lk. viii. 44; Jn. xix. 2; Rey. xix. 16; it is distinguished from the χιτών in Mt. v.40; ΓΚ. vi. 29; [cf. Jn. xix. 23]; Actsix.39. [CE. Trench 81].…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἱμάτιον. The plural is used = “‘ garments’’ generally, as in Mk 5%°, in the marriage contract P Ryl IT. 1548 (a.p. 66) ἱμα[τίω]ν o[r]oda[s] δύο, λευκὴι pla [ναρ]κ[ι]σσίνη μία, kal πάλλ[ι]α πέντε, ‘in raiment two robes, one white, one narcissus, and five mantles ” (Edd.): cf. PSI I. 9418 (ii/a.D.) μὴ ἀγωνία δὲ περὶ τῶν ἱματίων. In P Lille I. 6° (iii/B.c.) the ἱμάτιον is distinguished from the inner χιτών in the account of a robbery—e§éSuoayv χιτῶνα ἄξιον (δραχμὰς) 5, ἱμάτιον τριβακὸν (‘‘smooth,” “δης᾽)) ἄξιον (δραχμὰς) §: cf. P Par 59. (B.C.160) πέπρακα τὸ ὀθόνιον (δραχμῶν) ᾧ καὶ τὸ εἷμάτιον (δραχμῶν) Tr. The weaving of the χιτώνιον and ἱμάτιον is mentioned in P Lond 429% 41 (c. a.D. 350) (= II. p- 315) ‘‘ probably a religious ceremony, ’’ according to the editor, ‘‘like the weaving of the peplos at Athens.” exx. of the word are P Petr II. 32 (1)18 ἱμάτια Αἰγύπτια, P Fay 129 ((. B.c.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἱμάτιον (himation) — clothing.

ἱμάτιον [ῑμᾰ-], τό,

in form a diminutive of ἷμα (i.e. εἷμα), a piece of dress; in usage always of an outer garment, formed by an oblong piece of cloth worn above the χιτών, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θοἰμάτιον by crasis for τὸ ἱμ-, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the Roman toga, [Refs 1st c.AD+], of civilians,= togati, [Refs]; but ἱ. Ἑλληνικόν, opposed to the toga, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. ἱμάτια, τά, generally, clothes, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; of grave-clothes, ἐν εἱμ. τρισὶ [θάπτειν] [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. metaphorically, ἱμάτια πόλεως τείχη [Refs]

II. generally, cloth, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 1st c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἱμάτιον

himation

neuter of a presumed derivative of ennumi (to put on); a dress (inner

or outer):--apparel, cloke, clothes, garment, raiment, robe, vesture.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἱμάτιον, ου, τό

n.n.

outer garment

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἱμάτιον himation 60x

a garment; the upper garment, mantle, Mt. 5:40; 9:16, 20, 21; pl. the mantle and tunic together, Mt. 26:65; pl. genr. garments, raiment, Mt. 11:8; 24:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἱμάτιον in form a Dim. of ἷμα, i.e. εἷμα an outer garment, a cloak or mantle worn above the χιτών, the same as Homer's χλαῖνα, Hdt., Ar.:—used of the Roman toga, ἐν ἱματίοις, Lat. togati, Plut.

ἱμάτια, τά, generally, clothes, Hdt., Dem.

generally, a cloth, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APN — Noun · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The chief garments of the Hebrews were the tunic or inner garment, and the mantle or outer garment. These seem to have constituted a "change of Rainment," Jud 14:13 19:1-30 Ac 9:39. The tunic was of linen, and was worn next to the skin, fitting close to the body; it had armholes, and sometimes wide and open sleeves, and reached below the knees; that worn by females reached to the ankles. The tunic was sometimes woven without seam, like that of Jesus, Joh 19:23. The upper garment or mantle was a piece of cloth nearly square, and two or three yards in length and breadth, which was wrapped round the body, or tied over the shoulders. A man without this robe on was sometimes said to be "naked,"

- Origin of

Ge 3:7,21

- CALLED

. Raiment

Ge 28:20; De 8:4

. Clothes

Pr 6:27; Eze 16:39

. Clothing

Job 22:6; 31:19

. Vesture

Ge 41:42; Re 19:16

- MATERIALS USED FOR

. Wool

Pr 27:26; Eze 34:3

. Silk

Pr 31:22

. Linen

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
49%garments
garments49% · 31×garment14% · 9×cloak11% · 7×clothing11% · 7×cloaks6% · 4×robe5% · 3×other renderings3% · 2×

63 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object70%adverbial17%subject8%second object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 60 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςκράσπεδονthe fringe, edgeκαίand, even, also,
ἐπί
ἄγναφοςunshrunken, newἐπιράπτωI sew onἐπιβάλλωI throw upon, la
καίand, even, also, nam
κεφαλήthe headχιτώνa tunic, garmentπλουτέωI become rich
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
πᾶςall, the whole, αὐτός
ἐν
περιβάλλωI cast around, c
ἱμάτιονgarments60×
what comes after →
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,βάλλωI cast, throw, rσῴζωI save, heal
καίand, even, also, nam
χείρωνworseἐπικαθίζωI sit uponArticle the
παλαιόςold, ancient, worn o
εἰCondαἴρωI raise, lift up
λευκόςwhite, bright
καίand, even, also,ἵναin order that, s
ἑαυτοῦ
ἐνἀναπηδάωI leap into, rus

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἱμάτιον · 60× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark Luke Acts Revelation John Hebrews 1 Peter James
Across the New Testament9 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 120 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.239c. AD 40

πλὴν οὐκ ἀφίσταται ζυγομαχοῦσα ἡ ἡδονή, ἀλλὰ τῶν ἱματίων λαβομένη φησί „Κοιμήθητι μετ’ ἐμοῦ“.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.54c. AD 75–95

ὡς δʼ ἐξέφυγεν ὑπὸ ὀργῆς ὁ Ἰώσηπος προσκαταλιπὼν καὶ τὸ ἱμάτιον, κατεχούσης καὶ γὰρ αὐτὸν ἐκ τούτου μεθεὶς ἐξεπήδησε τοῦ δωματίου, περιδεὴς γενομένη, μὴ κατείπῃ πρὸς τὸν ἄνδρα αὐτῆς, καὶ τῆς ὕβρεως περιαλγῶς ἔχουσα φθάσαι καταψεύσασθαι πρὸς τὸν…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.4c. AD 100

τότε ῥαγήσεται πρώϊμον τὸ φῶς σου, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτιά σου ταχέως ἀνατελεῖ, καὶ προπορεύσεται ἔμπροσθέν σου ἡ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ ἡ δόξα τοῦ θεοῦ περιστελεῖ σε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59469276 BC–227 BC

ὑπόμνημα Ζήνωνι παρὰ Μηνοδώρου. ἀγοράσαι ἱμάτιον καὶ χιτωνάριον, μάλιστα μὲν ἐὰν παραπίπτηι χειριδωτόν, εἰ δὲ μή, τῶν … ερων. εἰ

λ δραχμαὶ λζ τριώβολον, χιτὼν γυναικεῖος δραχμαὶ μ, ποδείων ζεῦγος α δραχμαὶ δ· Κόνωνος ἱμάτιον δραχμαὶ κε. ἔτους λϛ, Δίου δ. Ἀπολλωνίου κεράμια σκ· Χαριδήμου καυνάκαι β πο μναῖ

ποτήριον χαλκοῦν, σκάφιον, κόνδυ, ἵνιον, χιτὼν παιδικός, ἐριᾶ ἐντύλη πόκων λε, σακκοπήρα ἐν ἧι ἱμάτιον, χλαμύς, λυχνία, ταπίδιον πυρρὸν καὶ ἱδρῶια καινὰ γ, ἄλλα ἱδρῶια παλαιὰ ϛ ὧν στρογγύλα

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
λευκὰleukos white G3022 Adjective · accusative · plural · neuter
25× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
White describes something that is bright and clean. It is used to describe Jesus' clothes in Matthew 17:2 and the clothing of angels in Acts 1:10.
Tyndale gloss
white
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word λευκός (i.e., *leukos*) means 'white' or 'bright,' derived from the root for 'light.' It covers a range of meanings from the literal color of objects like clothing and grain to metaphorical uses indicating clarity or purity. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts describing the dazzling garments of angels and the purity of souls.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λευκός, ή, -όν,

[in LXX chiefly for לָבָן;]

bright, brilliant: of clothing, Mt 17:2, Mk 9:3 16:5, Lk 9:29, Ac 1:10, Re 3:5 4:4 6:11 7:9, 13 19:14 (cf. Ec 9:8); ὡς χιών, Mt 28:3; ἐν λ. (sc. ἱματίοις), Jo 20:12, Re 3:4; θρόνος, Re 20:11.

white: Mt 5:36, Re 1:14 2:17 4:4…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λευκός, τή, -όν, (λεύσσω to see, behold, look at; akin ta Lat. luceo, Germ. leuchten; cf. Curtius p. 113 and § 87; [Vanizek p. 8177), Sept. for 139; 1. light, bright, brilliant: τὰ ἱμάτια . . . λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς, Mt. xvii. 2; esp. bright or brilliant from whiteness, (dazzling) white: spoken of the garments of angels, and of those exalted to the splendor of the heavenly state, Mk. xvi.5; Lk. ix. 29; Actsi.10; Rev. iii.5; iv.4; vi. 11; vii. 9,13; xix. 14, (shining or white garments were worn on festive and state occasions, Eccles. ix. 8; οἵ. Heindorf on Hor. sat. 2, 2,61); with ὡσεὶ or ὡς ὁ χιών added: Mk. ix. 3 RL; Mt. xxviii. 3, (ἵπποι λευκότεροι χιόνος, Hom. Il. 10, 437); ἐν λευκοῖς sc. ἱματίοις (added in Rev. iii. 5; iv. 4), Jn. xx.12; Rev. iii. 4; ef. W. 591 (550); [B. 82 (72)]; used of white garmentsas the sign of innocence and purity of soul, Rev. iii. 18; of the heavenly throne…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λευκός. In a list of soldiers, P Amh II. 625 (11.8.6.} three persons called Apollonius are distinguished as μέλας, ‘‘the dark,’’ λευκός, ‘‘ the fair,” and oKevod(dpos), “‘ the baggagecarrier,” respectively. For the more general meaning of λευκός, ‘‘white,’’ cf. such passages as P Ryl II. 146'° (A.D. 39) ἐρίων σταθμία δέκα λευκῶν, ‘* 10 measures of white wool,” P Giss I. 21° (time of Trajan) τὸ συνθεσείδιον τὸ λευκόν, ‘the white dress”—a loose wrap often worn at meals, P Oxy III. 53178 (ii/A.D.) τὰ ἱμάτια τὰ λευκά, and P Hamb I. 38% (a.p. 182) λευκὸν ἐν ὀφθαλμῷ ἀριστερῴ. In P Oxy III. 471™* (ii/a.D.) the charge is brought against | ἁγνὸν ἐν] ἐσθῆτι λευκ[ῆι.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λευκός (leukos) — white.

λευκός, ή, όν,

light, bright, clear (opposed to μέλας in all senses), αἴγλη [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λευκὸν (variant{λαμπρόν}).. ἠέλιος ὥς [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of metallic surfaces, λέβης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λ. γαλήνη a glassy calm, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of water, clear, limpid, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. metaphorically, clear, distinct, of the voice, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: in literary sense, clear, λ. στίχος [Refs 1st c.AD+], when a rogue was detected, [Refs] adverb -κῶς, πάντα φαίνειν, of Hermes, [Refs 1st c.AD+]: comparative -ότερον, διαλεχθῆναι [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

II. of colour, white, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+], varying from the pure white of snow ([ἵπποι] -ότεροι χιόνος [Refs 8th c.BC+] to the grey of dust (λευκοὶ ἐγένοντο κονισάλῳ [Refs]; λ. ἅρμα, ={λεύκιππον}, [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λευκός

leukos

from luke ("light"); white:--white.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λευκός, ή, όν

Adj

white, bright

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λευκός leukos 25x

pr. light, bright; white, Mt. 5:36; 17:2; whitening, growing white, Jn. 4:35

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

λευκός λευκός, ή, όν from Root ΛΥΚ light, bright, brilliant, of sun light, Hom., Soph.; and of metallic surfaces, λέβης Il.; also, λ. γαλήνη a glassy calm, Od.; of water, generally, bright, limpid, Hom., Eur.

metaph. clear, plain, distinct, of authors, Anth.

of colour, white, Hom., etc.; λ. ἅρμα ῀ λεύκιππον, Eur.

of the skin, white, fair, Hom., Trag.; with a notion of bare, πούς Eur., cf. λευκόπους:—later, as a mark of effeminacy, blanched, white, pale, Ar., Xen.:— λευκαὶ φρένες in Pind. may be pale with envy, envious.

λ. χρυσός, pale gold, i. e. gold alloyed with silver (prob. the same as ἤλεκτρον), opp. to χρυσὸς ἄπεφθος, Hdt.

λευκὸν ἦμαρ νυκτὸς ἐκ μελαγχίμου a bright day after a night of mourning, Aesch.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-APN — Adjective · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-APN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

hwit.

See COLORS.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

White

A symbol of purity (2 Chr. 5:12; Ps. 51:7; Isa. 1:18; Rev. 3:18; 7:14). Our Lord, at his transfiguration, appeared in raiment “white as the light” (Matt. 17:2, etc.).

Nave's Topical Bible

→ See COLOR

Thompson Chain Reference topics

a colour symbolical of purity

Da 12:10; Mt 28:3; Re 2:17; 3:4; 4:4; 6:2; 7:9; 19:8; 20:11

--SEE White Raiment,

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%white
white100% · 25×

25 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate28%object28%subject20%adverbial20%second object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 25 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
στολήa long robe
περιβάλλωI cast around, cἕκαστοςeach, every one
ἱμάτιονouter garment
ἐνκαίand, even, also,
ἵπποςa horse
ὁράωI see, look uponἐπί
θρίξa hair
εἷςoneArticle the
αὐτός
ἔνδυμαa garment, raimeἱματισμόςraiment, clothin
λευκόςwhite25×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐπίArticle theἐκθαμβέωI am greatly ast
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
χιώνsnowArticle theἔριονwool
ποιέωI do, make
Disj
λίανvery, very much, exc
οἷος
ἐξαστράπτωI flash forth like l

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλευκός · 25× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew John Mark Acts Luke
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 26 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.7c. AD 40

πῶς ἡμῶν ὁ νοῦς καταλαμβάνει, ὅτι τουτὶ λευκὸν ἢ μέλαν ἐστίν, εἰ μὴ βοηθῷ χρησάμενος ὁράσει;

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.320c. AD 75–95

ὁρῶν γὰρ αὐτῷ τὸν θεὸν πρὸς ὅτι θελήσειε συλλαμβανόμενον ὑπισχνεῖτο τῶν τεχθησομένων αὐτῷ παρέξειν ἔσθʼ ὅτε μὲν ὅτι καὶ γένοιτο λευκόν, ποτὲ δʼ αὖ τὰ μέλανα τῶν γεννωμένων.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 1.2.2c. AD 140

ταῦτά μου συμβουλευομένου καὶ διακρίνοντος ἐν τῇ κάρδίᾳ μου, βλέπω κατέναντί μου καθέδραν λευκὴν ἐξ ἐρίων χιονίνων γεγονυῖαν μεγάλην: καὶ ἦλθεν γυνὴ πρεσβῦτις ἐν ἱματισμῷ λαμπροτάτῳ, ἔχουσα βιβλίον εἰς τὰς χεῖρας, καὶ ἐκάθισεν μόνη καὶ ἀσπάζεταί με:…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. AD
P.Coll.Youtie 1 19Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 44

ἀριστερῶι ὑπτίωι, τῆι ἑαυτῆς Φιλοξένας ἀδελφῆι Εὐδαιμονίδι ὡς ἐτῶν κβ μέσηι μελίχρωι μακροπροσώπωι εὐθύρινι λευκὸν ὀφθαλμοῦ δεξιοῦ … μετὰ κυρίου … ὡς ἐτῶν … οὐλὴ μετώπωι ἐκ δεξιῶν, παρακεχωρηκέναι

P.Aberd. 55Soknopaiu Nesos? (Arsinoites)AD 117–AD 138

Ἀρτεμίδωρος νεώτερος Ἀρτεμιδώρου Χαιρήμονι Σαταβοῦτος χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ πεπρακέναι σοι ὄνον θήλειαν λευκὴν ταύτην τοιαύτην ἀναπόρριφον καὶ ἀπέχω τὴν συνπεφωνημένην τιμὴν πᾶσαν ἐκ πλήρους ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ἑξήκοντα,

P.Grenf. 2 46Kerkesucha (Arsinoites)AD 137

Πανεφρέμμει Ἀπύγχεως ὡς ἐτῶν λ οὐλὴ μετώπῳ ἐκ δεξιῶν, πεπρακέναι αὐτῷ ὄνον θήλειαν τελείαν λευκὴν μυόχρουν ἀναπόριφον. ἀπέχει τιμὴν ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ἑκατὸν ἓξ · καὶ βεβαιοῖ ὑπογραφεὺς τοῦ ἠγορακότος

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
ἵναhina so that G2443 Conjunction
669× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'in order that' or 'to', showing purpose or result, as seen in Acts 19:4 and Romans 11:31. It's used to express a goal or outcome. In Ephesians 1:17, it's used to describe a purpose.
Tyndale gloss
in order that/to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἵνα is primarily a conjunction meaning 'in order that' or 'that,' indicating purpose or intention. It can also function as an adverb of place, meaning 'where' or 'whither.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often introducing clauses that express purpose, such as in Matthew 1:22. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings or usages.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἵνα,

adverb (poët., Hom., al.),

of place, where, whither.

of circumstance, when.

Conjunction,

prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Ac 19:4, Ro 11:31 (?), Ga 2:10, al.);

c. optat. (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph 1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; v. Burton, § 225, Rem., 2);

c. subjc.: after a pres., Mk 4:21, Lk 6:34, Jo 3:15, Ac 2:25,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 186 sqq-.) thought he had found two examples in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have leatned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the second, iva αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. “ iva I. a final Conjunction (for from local direction, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy te mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα pn, that not, lest; it is used…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἵνα (hina) — in order that/to.

ἵνα,

adverb,

I. of Place,

I.1. in that place, there, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.2. elsewhere relative, in which place, where,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵ. ἡ Νίκη (i.e. ἐστίν) [Refs 8th c.BC+] [same place]; ἵν᾽ ἄν with subjunctive, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as indirect interrogative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. b after [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔμαθε ἵ. ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵν᾽ ἕσταμεν χρείας[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. c with Verbs of motion, whither, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. of circumstance, γάμος.., ἵ. χρή at which, when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵ. μὲν ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς.., ἐνταῦθα.. when it was in their power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. ={ἐάν}, uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἵνα

hina

probably from the same as the former part of 1438 (through the

demonstrative idea; compare 3588); in order that (denoting the purpose

or the result):--albeit, because, to the intent (that), lest, so as,

(so) that, (for) to. Compare 3363.

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3363

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἵνα

Cj.

in order that, so that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἵνα hina 663x

that, in order that, Mt. 19:13; Mk. 1:38; Jn. 1:22; 3:15; 17:1; ἵνα μή, that not, lest, Mt. 7:1; in NT equivalent to ὥστε, so that, so as that, Jn. 9:2; also, marking a simple circumstance, the circumstance that, Mt. 10:25; Jn. 4:34; 6:29; 1 Jn. 4:17; 5:3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἵνα Adverb,

of Place,

demonstr. in that place, there, only in Il. 10. 127.

relat., = ὅπου, in which place, where, Hdt., etc.;—so, ἵνα τε Il.; ἵνα περ Hom.:—c. gen., ἵνα γῆς in whatever part of the land, Hdt.; ἔμαθε ἵνα ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, id. Hdt.; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ Soph.

= ὅποι, with Verbs of motion, whither, Od.; ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ ἥκεις Soph.

of circumstance, when, at which, Od.

Final Conjunction, = ὅπως, that, in order that, Lat. ut, Hom.:

with subj.,

after principal tenses of ind., id. Hom., etc.

after historical tenses, in similes, where the aor. refers to any possible time, Od.

after opt. and ἄν, ἔδωκε μένος, ἵνα γένοιτο she gave him vigour, that he might become, Il.

with opt., after historical tenses, Hom., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

so (co', although the Hebrew might be pointed cewe'; Assyrian Sib'u; Septuagint Segor, Soa; Manetho, Seuechos; Latin Sevechus; Herodotus (ii. 137 ff), Sabakon): In all probability the "Sabaeo" of Herodotus, the Shabaka, who founded the Ethiopian dynasty, the XXVth of Egyptian kings. His date is given as 715-707 BC (Flinders Petrie, History of Egypt, III, 281 ff), but we may suppose that before his accession to the throne he was entitled to be designated king, as being actually regent. To this So, Hoshea, king of Israel, made an appeal for assistance to enable him to throw off the yoke of the Assyrian Shalmaneser IV (2Ki 17:3). But Hoshea's submission to So brought him no advantage, for Shalmaneser came up throughout all the land and laid siege to Samaria. Not long after the fall of Samaria, So ventured upon an eastern campaign, and…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

So

(Nubian, Sabako), an Ethiopian king who brought Egypt under his sway. He was bribed by Hoshea to help him against the Assyrian monarch Shalmaneser (2 Kings 17:4). This was a return to the policy that had been successful in the reign of Jeroboam I.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

"So, king of Egypt," is once mentioned in the Bible -- (2 Kings 17:4) So has been identified by different writers with the first and second kings of the Ethiopian twenty-fifth dynasty, called by Manetho, Sabakon (Shebek) and Sebichos (Shebetek).

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

King of Egypt, made an alliance with Hoshea king of Israel, and promised him assistance; but was unable to prevent Shalmaneser king of Assyria from taking Samaria and subverting the kingdom, B. C. 721, 2Ki 17:4. See PHARAOH.

So is believed to have been the Servetus or Sabaco II of secular history, the second king of the Ethiopian or twenty-fifth dynasty, and the predecessor of Trihakah. A singular fact has been brought to light by the recent explorations at Nineveh, corroborating the Scripture record the more forcibly, because unexpected and direct. The Bible shows that Egypt and Assyria, though remote, were often in conflict during the height of the Assyrian ruins power, and that So was at war with Shalmaneser. After war comes the treaty of peace; and as the Bible prepares us to suppose such treaties were made, the Assyrian ruins…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
56%that
that56% · 382×so that40% · 271×other renderings4% · 24×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial8%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 669 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
παρακαλέωI summon, entreaἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide,δίδωμιI offer, give
σύ
λαλέωI speak, sayδιάδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐγώ
δίδωμιI offer, giveὑπέρπερί
ἀλλάbut, except
αὐτόςκόσμοςthe world, univeἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
τίςIrgἐγώἱκανόςsufficient, wort
ἵναso that669×
what comes after →
μήNeg
Article theτὶςεἰς
Article the
γραφήa writing, passaχαράjoy, gladnessλόγοςa word, speech,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theσύαὐτός
ἐν
αὐτόςἐγώὅς
εἰμίI am, exist
μετάεἷςoneἅγιοςset apart, holy,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἵνα · 669× in the New Testament
John Mark 1 Corinthians Luke 2 Corinthians Revelation Matthew Romans Ephesians Hebrews 1 John Acts

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 300 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.71c. AD 75–95

ἵνα καὶ τῆς πλινθίνης ἀφανισθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἡ λιθίνη μείνασα παράσχῃ μαθεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα δηλοῦσα καὶ πλινθίνην ὑπʼ αὐτῶν ἀνατεθῆναι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Edg. $1Alexandria259 BC–257 BC

καὶ θεῶν μὴ ὀκνήσῃς διελθὼν εἰς ἐμπόριον καὶ ἀγοράσας, οὐθὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἡμᾶς ἐπικωλύει, ἵνα μὴ ὑστερήσωμεν τῆς ἐργασίας. τὰς δὲ τιμὰς τούτων λαβὲ παρὰ Ἀπολλοφάνους. τὸ γύναιον ἐπίτοκον

vestiges … ἵνα μηθὲν ἐν τούτοις ἀγνοηθῆι … … Ἑρμίαι τῶν διαδόχων καὶ ἐπιμελητῆι, παρὰ Δρύτωνος τοῦ

P.Bour. 11Pathyris89 BC

ἕκαστος τῶν παρὰ σοὶ σιτοποιησάμενος πυροῦ ἀρτάβην μίαν ἐν ἑτοίμωι ἔσται αὐτοῖς ὁ ἄρτος, ἵνα δὲ καὶ κριθὴ ὑπάρξηι ἐπιμε … … ηγησαιἐμμέτρως αἴτησαιἐμμε … … τησαι ἔρρωσο ἔτους

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
περιβάλῃ,periballō you may be clothed G4016 Verb · second aorist · middle · subjunctive · second person · singular
23× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To clothe or invest someone with something, like putting on clothes or a palisade, as seen in Matthew 25:36 and Luke 23:11. This can also mean to array or put on something, like a garment or a defense.
Amplified meaning
covered, adorned
Tyndale gloss
to clothe
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

περιβάλλω means to throw around or over, often used in the context of clothing or wrapping oneself. It can also refer to surrounding or enclosing something, as seen in various New Testament passages like Matthew 25:36 and Luke 23:11. The word is built from the prefix περί (around) and βάλλω (to throw). There is a notable usage in Revelation, where it describes being wrapped or clothed in various contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

περι-βάλλω,

[in LXX chiefly for כּסה pi., also for לבשׁ, עטה, etc.;]

to throw around or over, put on or over;

of siege or defensive works: χάρακά σοι, Lk 19:43 (WH, mg.; παρεμβ-, WH, txt.);

of clothing, to put on, wrap about, clothe with: c. acc. rei, Lk 23:11; c. acc. pers., Mt 25:36, 38, 43; c. dupl. acc. (not cl.; Bl., § 34, 4), Jo 19:2; pf. pass., to have wrapped round one: c. acc. rei (cl.), Mk 14:51 16:5, Re 7:9, 13 10:1 11:3 12:1 17:4 18:16 19:13; c. dat. rei, Re 4:4 (WH, txt.; seq. ἐν, WH, mg.); fut., seq. ἐν (cf.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

περι-βάλλω : fut. περιβαλῶ ; 2 aor. περιέβαλον ; pf. pass. ptep. περιβεβλημένος ; 2 aor. mid. περιεβαλόμην ; 2 fut. mid. περιβαλοῦμαι ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for D3 to cover, cover up; also for way to clothe, and πιὸ» to veil; to throw around, to put round; a. UNG

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

περιβάλλω. For a good parallel to the TR of Lk 19% cr. P Oxy IV. 70782 (¢. A.D. 136) where a man is charged with neglecting a vineyarl—pySt τὰς πλάτας περιβεβληκέναι, “not even to have built the enclosing walls.” For the meaning ‘‘ wrap about,” ‘* clothe myself,’’ as in Mk 1451 (cf. Field Mores, p. 40), see P Fay 1218 (c, n.c. 103) ἐξέδυσαν ὃ περ[ιεἸβεβλήμην ἱμάτιον, ‘they stripped me of the garment in which I was clothed,” P Grenf I. 384 (ii/iB.c.) (asemended Berichtigungen, Ῥ. 182) ὅ τε περιεβλήμην ὀθόνιον κατέρηξεν, aud the

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

περιβάλλω (periballō) — to clothe.

περιβάλλω,

future -βᾰλῶ: aorist περιέβᾰλον (see. below):— throw round, about, or over, put on or over, with accusative of things, φίλας περὶ χεῖρε βαλόντε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. τινὶ δεσμά, βρόχους, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τινὰ χαλκεύματι put him round the sword, i. e. stab him, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; also περὶ τὰ στέρνα θώρηκας π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; περὶ ἕρμα π. ναῦν wreck it on.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, throw round or over oneself, put on, with accusative of things, περιβαλλόμενοι τεύχεα putting on their arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἷμα, φᾶρος περιβάλλεσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently of defences, τεῖχος καὶ σωτηρίην περιβαλέσθαι τοῖς τε χρήμασι καὶ τοῖς σώμασιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λιμένι τεῖχος, χάρακα τῇ παρεμβολῇ, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; also περὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον τεῖχος π. [Refs 5th c.BC+] build a wall round it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in perfect…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

περιβάλλω

periballo

from 4012 and 906; to throw all around, i.e. invest (with a palisade

or with clothing):--array, cast about, clothe(-d me), put on.

see GREEK for 4012

see GREEK for 906

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

περιβάλλω

v.

I cast around, clothe

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

περιβάλλω periballō 23x

to cast around; to clothe, Mt. 25:36, 38, 43; mid. to clothe one’s self, to be clothed, Mt. 6:29, 31; Lk. 23:11; Jn. 19:2; Acts 12:8; Rev. 4:4

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

περιβάλλω fut. -βα^λῶ aor2 -έβα^λον to throw round, περὶ χαῖρε βαλών having thrown his arms round him, Od.; χέρας π. τινί Eur.; περὶ δ᾽ ὠλένας δέρᾳ βάλοιμι id. Eur.; π. τινὶ δεσμά Aesch.; π. ναῦν περὶ ἕρμα to wreck it on a reef, Thuc.:—Mid. to throw round oneself, put on, c. acc. rei, τεύχεα περιβαλλόμενοι putting on their arms, Od.; π. ἔρυμα, ἕρκος, τείχεα to throw round oneself for defence, Hdt.; c. dupl. acc., τεῖχος περιβάλλεσθαι πόλιν to build a wall round it, id. Hdt.:—in perf. pass. to have a thing put round one, Plat.; περιβεβλημένος τὸ τεῖχος having his wall around him, id. Plat.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AMS-2S — Verb · second aorist · middle · subjunctive · second person · singular
second aorist middle subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AMS-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Middle Mood: Subjunctive Person: second Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
13%having clothed themselves with
having clothed themselves with13% · 3×having been clothed with9% · 2×do yourself wrap around4% · 1×will be clothed4% · 1×you may be clothed4% · 1×having clothed themselves4% · 1×having clothed himself with4% · 1×having clothed themselves in4% · 1×other renderings52% · 12×

23 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 23 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
δόξαhonor, renown, gσυνακολουθέωI accompanyλέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also, nam
γυμνόςwearing only the
ἵναin order that, so th
λευκόςwhite, brightαὐτός
Article the
οὗτοςμέγας
τίςIrg
Disj
περιβάλλωyou may be clothed23×
what comes after →
Article the
ἱμάτιονouter garmentστολήa long robeἥλιοςthe sun, sunligh
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
εἷςone
ἐγώ
ἀσθενέωI am weak, sickἀσθενήςweak, infirm, si
στολήa long robe
λευκόςwhite, bright
ἐν
ἱμάτιονouter garment

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπεριβάλλω · 23× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew Luke Mark Acts John
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 39 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Noah's Work as a Planter 65c. AD 40

ἤδη τινὰ τῶν παλαιῶν φασι καθάπερ ἐκπρεπεστάτης γυναικὸς τῷ σοφίας ἐπιμανέντα κάλλει πολυτελεστάτης πομπῆς θεασάμενον παρασκευὴν ἄφθονον, ἀπιδόντα πρός τινας τῶν συνήθων εἰπεῖν „ἴδετε, ὦ ἑταῖροι, ὅσων χρείαν οὐκ ἔχω“, καίτοι γε ἔξω τῶν ἀναγκαίων…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.270c. AD 75–95

ἐπεὶ δʼ εὐτρεπὲς ἦν τὸ δεῖπνον, ἐρίφου δέρματι τὸν βραχίονα περιβαλών, ἵνα πιστεύοιτο παρὰ τῷ πατρὶ διὰ τὴν δασύτητα Ἡσαῦς εἶναι, τὰ γὰρ ἄλλα πάντʼ ὢν ὅμοιος διὰ τὸ εἶναι δίδυμος τούτῳ μόνῳ διέφερε, καὶ φοβηθεὶς μὴ πρὶν γενέσθαι τὰς εὐχὰς εὑρεθεὶς…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Heid. 2 217Kerkeosiris? (Arsinoites)201 BC–102 BC

μέρος τοῦ σώματος καὶ διέκοψάν μου τὴν κεφαλὴν ῥάβδοις κραναίναις καὶ ἐξέδυσαν μηλωτὴν ἣν περιβεβλημένος ἱμάτιον ἔσχον ἀξίαν δραχμῶν ρε ὥς με διαφυγεῖν καὶ κινδυνεύειν με τῷ βίωι· ἐπιδίδωμι

P.Cair. Masp. 1 67005Antinoopolis (?)AD 568

Ἱερημίου τινος τῆς κώμης βοηθοῦ· ἀκουόμενος … του … θαλμου καὶ … σιν θανασίμοις περιβαλὼν ὁ εἰρημένος τιμωρητὴς Σενούθης ἀνείλετο αὐτόν· ἐκ δευτέρου δὲ κατὰ μηχανοπανουργίας τρόπον … σε

P.Lond. 5 1729SyeneAD 584

μελετῆσαί τινα κατὰ σοῦ ὡς μετὰ τὴν ἐμὴν τελευτὴν ἐνάγειν σοι ὁμολογῶ ὁμνύων τὸ περιβεβλημένον μοι σχῆμα ὅτι οὐδὲν μοι χρεωστεῖς οὔτε δέδωμεν σοι τί ποτε ἢ πεπράσκειν σοί

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
μὴ not G3361 Particle · negative
1,060× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Not is a word used to show that something is not true or is not happening, like in phrases that say 'lest' or 'God forbid', as seen in various parts of the New Testament.
Tyndale gloss
not
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μή () is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μή,

subjective negative particle,

used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]

As a neg. adv., not;

with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.

In delib. questions, c. subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mk 12:14, Ro 3:8.

In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mt 10:14,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μή (mē) — not.

μή,

Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)

__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,

__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μή

me

a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an

absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an

interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an

affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +

lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,

nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in

substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,

3373, 3375, 3378.

see GREEK for 3756

see GREEK for 3362

see GREEK for 3363

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 3373

see GREEK for 3375

see GREEK for 3378

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μή

Neg.prt.

not, lest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μή mē 1x

a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
71%not
not71% · 772×except9% · 95×unless5% · 58×surely not4% · 41×lest3% · 32×otherwise2% · 23×other renderings4% · 48×other renderings1% · 16×

1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial84%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,σύἐγώ
ἵναin order that, so th
αὐτόςσύπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώαὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist
εἰCond
αὐτόςυἱόςa son, descendenκαίand, even, also,
Article the
καίand, even, also,εἰςδιά
μήnot1060×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenσημεῖονa sign, miracle,
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
καίand, even, also,ποιμήνa shepherdβάθοςdepth, a depth,
εἰμίI am, exist
δίδωμιI offer, giveἐνμετά
τὶς
σύὑστερέωI am lacking, faγεννάωI beget, bring f
φοβέωI fear, am terrified
ἀπόArticle theμόνοςalone, but, only

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμή · 1,060× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy Galatians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
φανερωθῇphaneroō may be made manifest G5319 Verb · aorist · passive · subjunctive · third person · singular
49× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to reveal or make something visible, as in John 2:11 and Romans 1:19. It can be used to describe the act of making something clear or known, like in 1 Corinthians 4:5 and 2 Corinthians 2:14.
Tyndale gloss
to reveal
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φανερόω is a verb meaning to make visible, clear, or known, derived from the root φανερός. It covers a range of meanings from revealing something hidden to making oneself known, particularly in the context of Christ's manifestation (e.g., John 2:11, 1 John 3:2). The entries indicate that it can be used both actively and passively, with references throughout the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φανερόω, -ώ

[in LXX: Je 40 (33):6 (גּלה pi.) * ;]

to make visible, clear, manifest or known: c. acc rei, Jo 2:11 17:6, Ro 1:19, I Co 4:5, II Co 2:14 11:6, Col 4:4, Tit 1:3; pass., Mk 4:22, Jo 3:21 9:3, Ro 3:21 16:26, II Co 4:10, 11, Eph 5:13, Col 1:26, II Ti 1:10, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φανερόω, -@; fut. φανερώσω ; 1 aor. ἐφανέρωσα; Pass., pres. φανεροῦμαι ; pf. πεφανέρωμαι; 1 aor. ἐφανερώθην; 1 fut. φανερωθήσομαι ; (φανερός) ; to make manifest or visibie or known what has been hidden or unknown, to of the | pavepow manifest, whether by words, or deeds, or in any other way; a. with an ace. of the thing: pass., Mk. iv. 22; Eph. v. 13; Rev. iii. 18; τὰ ἔργα τινός, pass. Jn. iii. 21; with ἔν τινι added, Jn. ix. 3; τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, of Christ, Jn. ii. 11; sc. τὴν γνῶσιν, 2 Co. xi.6 LT Tr WH; τὰς βουλὰς τῶν καρδιῶν, of God as judge, 1 Co. iv. 5; τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ bt ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τύπῳ, 2 Co. ii. 14; τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ, pass. 2 Co. vii. 12; τὴν ζωὴν τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκί, pass. 2 Co. iv. 10 84. ; χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ φανερωθεῖσα διὰ τῆς ἐπιφανείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Tim. 1. 10; pass. used of something hitherto non-existent but now made…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

φανερόω, ““make clear,” ‘make known”: P Goodsp Cairo 1.519 (A.D. 362) ἐφανέρωσα τῇ μονῇ Kal τῷ Bonde [το]ῦ πραιποσίτου, “1 have made known both to the establishment of the praepfosttus and to his assistant” (Ed.). See also the Christian prayer P Oxy VI. 9254 (v/vi Α. Ὁ.) (= Selections, Ρ- 131) ὃ θ(εδὴς. . . φανέρωσόν μοι τὴν παρὰ σοὶ ἀλήθιαν εἰ βούλῃ με ἀπελθεῖν εἰς Χιούτ, ““Ο God, reveal to me thy truth, whether it be thy will that I go to Chiout” (Edd.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φανερόω (phaneroō) — to reveal.

φᾰνερ-όω,

make manifest, σεαυτὸν τῷ κόσμῳ [NT]; reveal, make clear, τινὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν [Refs 5th c.AD+]; ἀληθῆ πεφανέρωται have been demonstrated, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. make known or famous, [Refs 1st c.BC+]:—passive, become so, ἐφανερώθη ἐς τοὺς Ἕλληνας δαπάνῃσι μεγίστῃσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

φανερόω

phaneroo

from 5318; to render apparent (literally or figuratively):--appear,

manifestly declare, (make) manifest (forth), shew (self).

see GREEK for 5318

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φανερόω

v.

I make clear, visible, or manifest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φανερόω phaneroō 49x

to bring to light, to set in a clear light; to manifest, display, Jn. 2:11; 7:4; 9:3; to show, Rom. 1:19; 2 Cor. 7:12; to declare, make known, Jn. 17:6; to disclose, Mk. 4:22; 1 Cor. 4:5; Col. 4:4; to reveal, Rom. 3:21; 16:26; Col. 1:26; to present to view, Jn. 21:1, 14; pass. to make an appearance, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

φανερόω φα^νερόω, φυτ. -ώσω φανερός to make manifest, NTest.

to make known or famous:—Pass. to become so, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-APS-3S — Verb · aorist · passive · subjunctive · third person · singular
aorist passive subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-APS-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Subjunctive Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
13%revealed
revealed13% · 6×has been revealed6% · 3×he revealed6% · 3×being revealed4% · 2×may be manifested4% · 2×have been made manifest4% · 2×he shall appear4% · 2×he appeared4% · 2×other renderings53% · 25×

47 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 33 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 49 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἵναin order that, so th
ἀλλάbut, exceptμήNegφῶςlight, a source
καίand, even, also, nam
ΓαλιλαίαGalileeσκότοςdarknessπατήρfather, Father,
αὐτός
γάρforγνῶσιςknowledge, doctrσύν
οὗτος
μετάεἰςἐν
ἐγώ
σῶμαbody, fleshπᾶςall, the whole,
φανερόωmay be made manifest49×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸσραήλPropδόξαhonor, renown, gἔργονwork, labor, act
ἐν
ἕτεροςanother, differeArticle theπᾶςall, the whole,
δέbut, on the other ha
νῦνnow, already, atοὕτωthus, so, in thiκαιρόςfitting season,
καίand, even, also, nam
ὀνειδίζωI reproach, reviὁράωI see, look upon
αὐτός
Article theὡςas, like as, how

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφανερόω · 49× in the New Testament
1 John 2 Corinthians John Colossians Mark Romans 1 Peter Ephesians Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy
Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.47c. AD 40

εἰ δὲ ζητοῦσα εὑρήσεις θεόν, ἄδηλον, πολλοῖς γὰρ οὐκ ἐφανέρωσεν ἑαυτόν, ἀλλ’ ἀτελῆ τὴν σπουδὴν ἄχρι παντὸς ἔσχον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 17.38c. AD 75–95

πάντα δὲ ἀνίχνευέν τε καὶ πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφὸν μειζόνως ἐκδεινοῦσα ἀπεσήμαινεν συνόδους τε κρυπτὰς καὶ πότους βουλευτήριά τε ἀφανῶς κατεσκευασμένα, ὧν μὴ ἐπʼ ὀλέθρῳ τῷ ἐκείνου συντιθεμένων κἂν πεφανερῶσθαι μὴ κεκωλῦσθαι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.6c. AD 100

οἱ προφῆται, ἀπ̓ αὐτοῦ ἔχοντες τὴν χάριν, εἰς αὐτὸν ἐπροφήτευσαν: αὐτὸς δέ, ἵνα καταργήσῃ τὸν θάνατον καὶ τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν δείξῃ, ὅτι ὲν σαρκὶ ἕδει αὐτὸν φανερωθῆναι, ὑπέμεινεν,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 7th c. AD
P.Wisc. 1 3AD 256–AD 259

γεγηρακότα εἰμὶ γὰρ ὅλων ὀγδοήκοντα καὶ τριῶν ἐτῶν καὶ τὰ δόξαντα τῷ μεγέθει αὐτοῦ φανερωθῆναι ὑμῖν ἐποίησα πρὸ πολλοῦ μὲν ἔτι ἄνωθεν καὶ νῦν δὲ διὰ στρατηγικοῦ ὑπηρέτου, ἀλλὰ

PSI 7 767OxyrhynchosAD 331

τοῦ διασημοτάτου ἐπάρχου τῆς Αἰγύπτου Φλαουίου Ὑγίνου … γραμμάτια δι … … … ἀξιῶν φανερωθῆναι τοῖς ἑξῆς δανεισταῖς, ἵνʼ εἰδῶσι τὰ κεκελευσμένα καὶ τούτοις ἐξακολουθήσωσιν. εἰσὶ δέ·

τόμου δ. ἕως τούτων τὸ ἴσον. διευτύχει. ὑπατείας τῆς προκειμένης Μεχεὶρ κ. Ὡριγένης ἐπιδέδωκα. ἐφανέρωσα τῷ ἐνγεγραμμένῳ διὰ Νεκῆτος ὑπηρέτου Μεχεὶρ εἰκάδι

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
ho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSF — Article · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
αἰσχύνηaischunē shame G152 Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Shame or disgrace is the meaning of this word, as seen in Luke 14:19 and 2 Corinthians 4:2. It can describe a feeling of guilt or embarrassment. The KJV translates it as shame or dishonesty.
Tyndale gloss
shame
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αἰσχύνη (aischunē) refers to shame or disgrace, encompassing both subjective feelings of embarrassment and objective dishonor. It appears in various New Testament contexts, such as in Luke 14:9 and Philippians 3:19, where it denotes things that cause shame or are shameful. The term is often compared to αἰδώς (aidōs), with some distinction in meaning, particularly regarding the anticipation of dishonor versus the feeling after an unworthy act.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — αἰσχύνη, αἰδώς, ἐντροπή from a scan

THERE was a time when αἰδώς occupied that whole domain of meaning afterwards divided between it and αἰσχύνη. It had then the same duplicity of meaning which is latent in the Latin ‘pudor,’ in our own ‘shame;’ and indeed retained a certain duplicity of meaning till the last (Euripides, Hippol. 387-389). Thus Homer, who does not know αἰσχύνη, sometimes, as at Il. v. 787, uses αἰδώς, where αἰσχύνη would, in later Greek, have certainly been employed ; but elsewhere in that sense which, at a later period, it vindicated as exclusively its own (Jl. xiii. 122; ef. Hesiod, Op. 202). And even Thucydides, in a difficult and doubtful passage where both words occur (i. 84), is by many considered to have employed them as equipollent and convertible (Donaldson, Cratylus, 3rd ed. p. 545). So too in a passage of Sophocles, where they occur close together, αἰδώς joined with φόβος, and αἰσχύνη with δέος…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αἰσχύνη, -ης, ἡ

(< αἶσχος, shame, disgrace),

[in LXX chiefly for בּשֶׁת;]

shame (MM, VGT, s.v.): subjectively, Lk 14:19, II Co 4:2; objectively, Phl 3:19, He 12:2; as something to be ashamed of, Re 3:18; pl. (Bl., §32, 6), shameful deeds, Ju 13.†

SYN.: αἰδώς, q.v.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αἰσχύνη, -ης, 7, (αἶσχος [cf. aicxpds}); 1. subjectively, the confusion of one who is ashamed of anything, sense of shame: er αἰσχύνης suffused with shame, Lk. xiv. 9; τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης those things which shame conceals, opp. to φανέρωσις τῆς ἀληθείας, 2 Co. iv. 2 (evil arts of which one ought tobe ashamed). 2. objectively, ignominy: visited on one by the wicked, Heb. xii. 2; which ought to arise from guilt, Phil. iii. 19 (opp. to δόξα). 3. a thing to be ashamed of: ἡ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητος (gen. of appos.).nakedness to be ashamed of, Rev. iii. 18, ef. xvi. 15; plur. [ef. W. 176 (166)] ai αἰσχῦναι basenesses, disgraces, shameful deeds, Jude 13. [(Aeschyl., Hdt., al.) Syn. see αἰδώς, fin.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αἰσχύνη. In P Eleph 1° (a marriage contract, B.C. 311-10) (= Sedections, p. 2) provision is made that if the bride κακοτεχνοῦσα ἁλίσκηται ἐπὶ αἰσχύνηι τοῦ ἀνδρός, “shall be detected doing anything wrong to the shame of her husband,” he shall be entitled to take certain steps against her: cf. P Gen 21" (ii/B.c.) (us completed, Avchiv iii. p. 388) μηδ᾽ aifo]xtvev Μενεκράτην ὅσα φέρει ἀνδρὶ aicxivnv—the same formula in P Tebt I. 104° (B.c. 92). So P Par 47% (c. B.C. 153) (= Selections, p. 23) ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης, ‘for very shame,” P Oxy III. 47178 (ii/A.D.) ἅπαξ yap ἐν ἔθει τῆς οα[ἰσ]χύνης γενόμενον, ‘for when once accustomed to his shame.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αἰσχύνη (aischunē) — shame.

αἰσχύν-η [ῡ], ἡ,

shame, dishonour, ἐς αἰσχύνην φέρει[Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἰσχύνην φέρει, ἔχει, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἰ. περιίσταταί με, συμβαίνει μοι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. αἰ. γυναικῶν dishonouring of women, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γράφεσθαί τινα γένους αἰσχύνης for dishonour done to his race, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. concrete, of a person, αἰ. φίλοις, πάτρᾳ, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; of a decree, [Refs]

II. shame for an ill deed, personified in [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II.2. like{αἰδώς}, sense of shame, honour, πᾶσαν αἰ. ἀφείς[Refs 5th c.BC+]; δι᾽ αἰσχύνης ἔχειν τι to be ashamed of, [Refs]; αἰσχύνην ἔχειν τινός for a thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joined with δέος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; with ἔλεος and αἰδώς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν αἰσχύναις ἔχω I hold it…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αἰσχύνη

aischune

from 153; shame or disgrace (abstractly or concretely):--dishonesty,

shame.

see GREEK for 153

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αἰσχύνη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

shame

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αἰσχύνη aischunē 6x

shame, disgrace; cause of shame, dishonorable conduct

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αἰσχύνη αἶσχος shame done one, disgrace, dishonour, Hdt., attic

a disgrace, of a person, Aesch.

shame for an ill deed, personified in Aesch.

generally, like αἰδώς, shame, the sense of shame, Soph., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sham (bosh, "to be ashamed," bosheth, "shame," qalon; aischune, "ignominy," atimia, "dishonor," and other words): An oft-recurring word in Scripture almost uniformly bound up with a sense of sin and guilt. It is figuratively set forth as a wild beast (Jer 3:24), a Nessus-garment (Jer 3:25), a blight (Jer 20:18), a sin against one's own soul (Hab 2:10), and twice as the condensed symbol of Hebrew abomination--Baal (Jer 11:13 margin; Ho 9:10 margin; see ISH-BOSHETH). It is bracketed with defeat (Isa 30:3), reproach…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Jesus ashamed of those who deny him Mr 8:38; Lu 9:26

→ Of Adam and Eve Ge 3:10

→ Destitute of, the Israelites when they worshiped the golden calf Ex 32:25

→ The unjust Zep 3:5

→ Of the cross Heb 12:2

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%shame
shame100% · 6×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object50%adverbial17%predicate17%subject17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
κρυπτόςhidden, secretἐνφανερόωI make clear, vi
μετά
ἄρχωI begin
σταυρόςa cross
ὑπομένωI remain behind,
ἑαυτοῦ
Article the
αἰσχύνηshame
what comes after →
Article the
ἔσχατοςlast, at the lasγυμνότηςnakedness
μήNeg
περιπατέωI walk, conduct
αὐτός
Article the
καταφρονέωI despise, scorn
ἐν
ἀστήρa star
πλανήτηςa wanderer

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαἰσχύνη · 6× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians Hebrews Jude Luke Philippians Revelation
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 38 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Didache The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.70c. AD 40

ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἄρξωνται καταλαμβάνειν, ἐν αἰσχύνῃ καὶ ὕβρει γίνονται, εὑρεθήσονται γὰρ εὐηθείᾳ καὶ μωρίᾳ πολλάκις χρώμενοι μᾶλλον ἢ ὑγιαινούσῃ ἐπιστήμῃ, οὐ μόνον ἐν κόροις καὶ μελαγχολίαις καὶ παραφροσύναις ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἄλλῳ βίῳ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.201c. AD 75–95

τοῦ δὲ Λώτου παραινοῦντος σωφρονεῖν καὶ μὴ χωρεῖν ἐπʼ αἰσχύνῃ τῶν ξένων, ἀλλʼ ἔχειν αἰδῶ τῆς παρʼ αὐτῷ καταγωγῆς, εἰ δὲ ἔχουσιν ἀκρατῶς, τὰς θυγατέρας αὐτοῦ ὑπὲρ ἐκείνων ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτῶν λέγοντος παρέξειν, οὐδʼ οὕτως ἐπείσθησαν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 19.7c. AD 100

οὐκ ἔσῃ διγνώμων οὐδὲ γλωσσώδης, ὑποταγήσῃ κυρίοις ὡς τύπῳ θεοῦ ἐν αἰσχύνῃ καὶ φόβῳ: οὐ μὴ ἐπιτάξῃς δούλῳ σου ἡ παιδίσκῃ ἐν πικρίᾳ, τοῖς ἐπὶ τὸν αὐτὸν θεὸν ἐλπίζουσιν, μή ποτε οὐ μὴ φοβηθήσονται τὸν ἐπ’ ἀμφοτέροις θεόν: ὅτι οὐκ ἦλθεν κατὰ πρόσωπον…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 6th c. AD

ἐν τῶι Ἀνουβιείωι πίνων. οὐκ ἔστι ἀνακύψαί με πώποτε ἐν τῇ Τρικομίαι ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης, εἰ καὶ αὑτοὺς δεδώκαμεν καὶ ἀποπεπτώκαμεν πλανώμενοι ὑπὸ τῶν θεῶν καὶ πιστεύοντες τὰ ἐνύπνια.

PSI 8 889AD 501–AD 700

διὰ τὴν εὐγενεστάτην Εὐδοξίαν ἵνα επ … … … αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐπανέλυσεν μετὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης … … ων καὶ ἐγενάμην εἰς τοὺς πόδας αὐτῆς ἐν τῷ εὐλογημένῳ

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
τῆςho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
γυμνότητόςgumnotēs nakedness G1132 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word refers to a state of being naked or without clothes. In Romans 8:35 and 2 Corinthians 11:27, it talks about being without material things or being vulnerable.
Amplified meaning
exposed, vulnerable state
Tyndale gloss
nakedness
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word γυμνότης (i.e., *gumnotēs*) means 'nakedness' and is derived from γυμνός (*gumnos*). It refers to both physical nakedness and a lack of proper clothing, appearing in the New Testament in Romans 8:35, 2 Corinthians 11:27, and Revelation 3:18. Some entries also note its use in the Septuagint for the Hebrew word for nakedness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γυμνότης, -ητος, ἡ

(< γυμνός),

[in LXX for עֵירֹם, De 28:48 * ;]

nakedness: Ro 8:35, II Co 11:27, Re 3:18.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γυμνότης, -nros, ἧ, (γυμνός), nakedness: of the body, Rev. iii. 18 (see αἰσχύνη, 3); used of want of clothing, Ro. viii. 35; 2 Co. xi. 27. (Deut. xxviii. 48; Antonin. 11, 27.)

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γυμνότης (gumnotēs) — nakedness.

γυμνότης, ητος, ἡ,

nakedness, [LXX+NT+1st c.AD+]

2. bare statement, τῶν προτάσεων [Refs 1st c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

γυμνότης

gumnotes

from 1131; nudity (absolute or comparative):--nakedness.

see GREEK for 1131

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γυμνότης, ητος, ἡ

n.f.

nakedness

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γυμνότης gymnotēs 3x

nakedness; want of proper and sufficient clothing, Rom. 8:35; 2 Cor. 11:27; spiritual nakedness, being destitute of spiritual clothing, Rev. 3:18*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

γυμνότης γυμνός nakedness, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%nakedness
nakedness100% · 3×

3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject67%predicate33%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Disj
λιμόςa famine, hunger
καίand, even, also, nam
ψῦχοςcold
Article the
αἰσχύνηshame
γυμνότηςnakedness
what comes after →
Disj
κίνδυνοςdanger, peril, r
σύ
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγυμνότης · 3× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians Revelation Romans
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.59c. AD 40

καὶ Ἰακὼβ γυμνότητος ἐρᾷ ψυχικῆς — ἡ γὰρ λειότης αὐτοῦ γύμνωσίς ἐστιν —·

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
σου,su of you, G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singular
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2GS — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singular
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύof you,2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
κολλούριονkollourion eye-salve G2854 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Eye salve, a type of plaster, is mentioned in Revelation 3:18, where Jesus advises the church to buy it to heal their spiritual blindness. It was a small, roll-shaped ointment. The term is only used once in the New Testament.
Amplified meaning
healing ointment, eye salve
Tyndale gloss
eye salve
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word κολλούριον (*kollourion*) is a diminutive form of κολλύρα (*kollura*), referring to a small bread roll. It primarily denotes an eye salve shaped like a roll, as seen in Revelation 3:18. The term is also found in medical contexts, indicating its use as a remedy for eye ailments.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κολλούριον

(TTr., κολλύ-, the more usual form), -ου, τό (dimin. of κολλύρα = κόλλιξ, a coarse bread roll),

[in LXX: III Ki 12:24hil B*;]

a small bread roll (LXX, III Ki 12:24hil).

(Usually in pl., LS, s.v.) an eye salve shaped like a roll: Re 3:18.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κολλούριον (T Tr κολλύριον, the more common form in prof. auth. [ef. Lob. Pathol. proleg. p.461; WH. App. p- 1527), του, τό, (dimin. of κολλύρα, coarse bread of a cylindrical shape, like that known in Westphalia as Pumpernickel), Lat. collyrium (A.V. eye-salve], a preparation shaped like a κολλύρα, composed of various materials and used as a remedy for tender eyelids (Hor. sat. 1,5, 30; Epict. diss. 2,21, 20; 3, 21, 21; Cels. 6, 6, 7): Rev. iii. 18.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κολλούριον is common in medical receipts, e.g. P Oxy VIII. 1088} (early i/A.D.) τὸ μήλινον κολλ(ύριον) πρὸς ῥεῦμα καὶ ἑλκώματα καὶ πληγὰς καὶ αἱμάλωπας, “the yellow salve for discharges, wounds, bruises, and weals” (Ed.), 76.4% καὶ Χωρὶς ἕκαστον ἀναπλάσας μεθ᾽ ὕδατος κολλύρια πόει ἡλίκον Αἰγύπί( τιον) κύαμον, ‘work them up separately with water | Ύ μον. Ρ sep: y and make pastilles of the size of an Egyptian bean” (Ed.), P Flor II. 177°° (A.D. 257) χρήζουσι yap αὐτοῦ οἱ ἰατροὶ kal εἰς κολλούρια Kal εἰς ἑτέρας ἰατρικὰς χρείας (sc. λαγωδίων). The word is used with reference to eye-salve (cf. Rev 318) in Sy/2 80716 (after A.D. 138) where a receipt for anointing the eyes of a blind soldier is made up μετὰ μέλιτος καὶ κολλυρίου. In Rev Zc. there may be an allusion to the “Phrygian powder” used by oculists of the famous medical school at Laodicea: see C. and B.i. p. 52 (cited by Moffatt…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κολλούριον (kollourion) — eye salve.

κολλούρ-ιον, τό,

diminutive of {κολλούρα}, [Refs 3rd c.AD+].

II. κολλύριον, see: κολλούριον.

κολλούριον

(TTr., κολλύ-, the more usual form), -ου, τό (dimin. of κολλύρα = κόλλιξ, a coarse bread roll), [in LXX: 3Ki.12:24 hil B* ;]

1. a small bread roll (LXX, lines with).

2. (Usually in plural, LS, see word) an eye salve shaped like a roll: Rev.3:18.†

Strong's Greek Dictionary

κολλούριον

kollourion

neuter of a presumed derivative of kollura (a cake; prob akin to the

base of 2853); properly, a poultice (as made of or in the form of

crackers), i.e. (by analogy) a plaster:-- eyesalve.

see GREEK for 2853

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κολλούριον, ου, τό

n.n.

eye-salve

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κολλούριον kollourion 1x

also spelled κολλύριον, collyrium, eye-salve, Rev. 3:18*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%eye-salve
eye-salve100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceκολλούριον · 1× in the New Testament
Revelation
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
ἵναhina so that G2443 Conjunction
669× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'in order that' or 'to', showing purpose or result, as seen in Acts 19:4 and Romans 11:31. It's used to express a goal or outcome. In Ephesians 1:17, it's used to describe a purpose.
Tyndale gloss
in order that/to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἵνα is primarily a conjunction meaning 'in order that' or 'that,' indicating purpose or intention. It can also function as an adverb of place, meaning 'where' or 'whither.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often introducing clauses that express purpose, such as in Matthew 1:22. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings or usages.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἵνα,

adverb (poët., Hom., al.),

of place, where, whither.

of circumstance, when.

Conjunction,

prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Ac 19:4, Ro 11:31 (?), Ga 2:10, al.);

c. optat. (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph 1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; v. Burton, § 225, Rem., 2);

c. subjc.: after a pres., Mk 4:21, Lk 6:34, Jo 3:15, Ac 2:25,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 186 sqq-.) thought he had found two examples in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have leatned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the second, iva αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. “ iva I. a final Conjunction (for from local direction, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy te mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα pn, that not, lest; it is used…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἵνα (hina) — in order that/to.

ἵνα,

adverb,

I. of Place,

I.1. in that place, there, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.2. elsewhere relative, in which place, where,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵ. ἡ Νίκη (i.e. ἐστίν) [Refs 8th c.BC+] [same place]; ἵν᾽ ἄν with subjunctive, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as indirect interrogative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. b after [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔμαθε ἵ. ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵν᾽ ἕσταμεν χρείας[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. c with Verbs of motion, whither, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. of circumstance, γάμος.., ἵ. χρή at which, when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵ. μὲν ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς.., ἐνταῦθα.. when it was in their power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. ={ἐάν}, uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἵνα

hina

probably from the same as the former part of 1438 (through the

demonstrative idea; compare 3588); in order that (denoting the purpose

or the result):--albeit, because, to the intent (that), lest, so as,

(so) that, (for) to. Compare 3363.

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3363

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἵνα

Cj.

in order that, so that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἵνα hina 663x

that, in order that, Mt. 19:13; Mk. 1:38; Jn. 1:22; 3:15; 17:1; ἵνα μή, that not, lest, Mt. 7:1; in NT equivalent to ὥστε, so that, so as that, Jn. 9:2; also, marking a simple circumstance, the circumstance that, Mt. 10:25; Jn. 4:34; 6:29; 1 Jn. 4:17; 5:3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἵνα Adverb,

of Place,

demonstr. in that place, there, only in Il. 10. 127.

relat., = ὅπου, in which place, where, Hdt., etc.;—so, ἵνα τε Il.; ἵνα περ Hom.:—c. gen., ἵνα γῆς in whatever part of the land, Hdt.; ἔμαθε ἵνα ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, id. Hdt.; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ Soph.

= ὅποι, with Verbs of motion, whither, Od.; ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ ἥκεις Soph.

of circumstance, when, at which, Od.

Final Conjunction, = ὅπως, that, in order that, Lat. ut, Hom.:

with subj.,

after principal tenses of ind., id. Hom., etc.

after historical tenses, in similes, where the aor. refers to any possible time, Od.

after opt. and ἄν, ἔδωκε μένος, ἵνα γένοιτο she gave him vigour, that he might become, Il.

with opt., after historical tenses, Hom., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

so (co', although the Hebrew might be pointed cewe'; Assyrian Sib'u; Septuagint Segor, Soa; Manetho, Seuechos; Latin Sevechus; Herodotus (ii. 137 ff), Sabakon): In all probability the "Sabaeo" of Herodotus, the Shabaka, who founded the Ethiopian dynasty, the XXVth of Egyptian kings. His date is given as 715-707 BC (Flinders Petrie, History of Egypt, III, 281 ff), but we may suppose that before his accession to the throne he was entitled to be designated king, as being actually regent. To this So, Hoshea, king of Israel, made an appeal for assistance to enable him to throw off the yoke of the Assyrian Shalmaneser IV (2Ki 17:3). But Hoshea's submission to So brought him no advantage, for Shalmaneser came up throughout all the land and laid siege to Samaria. Not long after the fall of Samaria, So ventured upon an eastern campaign, and…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

So

(Nubian, Sabako), an Ethiopian king who brought Egypt under his sway. He was bribed by Hoshea to help him against the Assyrian monarch Shalmaneser (2 Kings 17:4). This was a return to the policy that had been successful in the reign of Jeroboam I.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

"So, king of Egypt," is once mentioned in the Bible -- (2 Kings 17:4) So has been identified by different writers with the first and second kings of the Ethiopian twenty-fifth dynasty, called by Manetho, Sabakon (Shebek) and Sebichos (Shebetek).

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

King of Egypt, made an alliance with Hoshea king of Israel, and promised him assistance; but was unable to prevent Shalmaneser king of Assyria from taking Samaria and subverting the kingdom, B. C. 721, 2Ki 17:4. See PHARAOH.

So is believed to have been the Servetus or Sabaco II of secular history, the second king of the Ethiopian or twenty-fifth dynasty, and the predecessor of Trihakah. A singular fact has been brought to light by the recent explorations at Nineveh, corroborating the Scripture record the more forcibly, because unexpected and direct. The Bible shows that Egypt and Assyria, though remote, were often in conflict during the height of the Assyrian ruins power, and that So was at war with Shalmaneser. After war comes the treaty of peace; and as the Bible prepares us to suppose such treaties were made, the Assyrian ruins…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
56%that
that56% · 382×so that40% · 271×other renderings4% · 24×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial8%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 669 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
παρακαλέωI summon, entreaἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide,δίδωμιI offer, give
σύ
λαλέωI speak, sayδιάδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐγώ
δίδωμιI offer, giveὑπέρπερί
ἀλλάbut, except
αὐτόςκόσμοςthe world, univeἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
τίςIrgἐγώἱκανόςsufficient, wort
ἵναso that669×
what comes after →
μήNeg
Article theτὶςεἰς
Article the
γραφήa writing, passaχαράjoy, gladnessλόγοςa word, speech,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theσύαὐτός
ἐν
αὐτόςἐγώὅς
εἰμίI am, exist
μετάεἷςoneἅγιοςset apart, holy,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἵνα · 669× in the New Testament
John Mark 1 Corinthians Luke 2 Corinthians Revelation Matthew Romans Ephesians Hebrews 1 John Acts

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 300 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.71c. AD 75–95

ἵνα καὶ τῆς πλινθίνης ἀφανισθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἡ λιθίνη μείνασα παράσχῃ μαθεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα δηλοῦσα καὶ πλινθίνην ὑπʼ αὐτῶν ἀνατεθῆναι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Edg. $1Alexandria259 BC–257 BC

καὶ θεῶν μὴ ὀκνήσῃς διελθὼν εἰς ἐμπόριον καὶ ἀγοράσας, οὐθὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἡμᾶς ἐπικωλύει, ἵνα μὴ ὑστερήσωμεν τῆς ἐργασίας. τὰς δὲ τιμὰς τούτων λαβὲ παρὰ Ἀπολλοφάνους. τὸ γύναιον ἐπίτοκον

vestiges … ἵνα μηθὲν ἐν τούτοις ἀγνοηθῆι … … Ἑρμίαι τῶν διαδόχων καὶ ἐπιμελητῆι, παρὰ Δρύτωνος τοῦ

P.Bour. 11Pathyris89 BC

ἕκαστος τῶν παρὰ σοὶ σιτοποιησάμενος πυροῦ ἀρτάβην μίαν ἐν ἑτοίμωι ἔσται αὐτοῖς ὁ ἄρτος, ἵνα δὲ καὶ κριθὴ ὑπάρξηι ἐπιμε … … ηγησαιἐμμέτρως αἴτησαιἐμμε … … τησαι ἔρρωσο ἔτους

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
ἐγχρῖσαιegchriō to anoint G1472 Verb · aorist · active · subjunctive · third person · singular
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This term refers to applying oil or another substance to something by rubbing it in. It is used in Revelation 3:18 to describe anointing.
Tyndale gloss
to rub on
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐγχρίω (i.e., *egchrio*) means to rub in or anoint. It is derived from the components meaning 'in' and 'to smear.' The term is primarily used in the New Testament in Revelation 3:18, where it refers to anointing. Additionally, it has a broader range that includes meanings like to sting or prick, though these are less relevant in biblical contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγ-χρίω,

[in LXX: Je 4:30 (קרע). To 2:10 6:8 11:7 * ;]

to rub in, anoint: mid., c. dupl. acc., Re 3:18.†

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγχρίω, which in the NT is confined to Rev 318, occurs twice in magical papyri—P Lond 46% (iv/a.D.) (=I. p. 67) (&)xpte δὲ τὸν δεξιὸν ὀφθαλμ(ὸν) μεθ᾽ ὕδατος πλοίου vevavaynkoros, τό. 121% (jii/A.D.) (=I. p. 95) ἔνχρειε τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐγχρίω (egchriō) — to rub on.

ἐγχρίω [ῑ],

anoint, ἀλείμμασιν ἑαυτόν [NT+4th c.BC+]:—middle, anoint oneself, ἰξοῦ [Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἐ. τὸ πρόσωπον[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—passive, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

II. sting, prick, τινί [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, ἰὸς ἐγχρισθείς poison injected by a sting, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II.2. stick in, τὸ κέντρον [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγχρίω

egchrio

from 1722 and 5548; to rub in (oil), i.e. besmear:--anoint.

see GREEK for 1722

see GREEK for 5548

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐγχρίω

v.

I rub in, anoint

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγχρίω enchriō 1x

to rub in, anoint, Rev. 3:18*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐγχρίω fut. σω to rub, anoint, τινί with a thing, Anth.

to sting, prick, τινί Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAS-3S — Verb · aorist · active · subjunctive · third person · singular
aorist active subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAS-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Subjunctive Person: third Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Anoint

The practice of anointing with perfumed oil was common among the Hebrews. (1.) The act of anointing was significant of consecration to a holy or sacred use; hence the anointing of the high priest (Ex. 29:29; Lev. 4:3) and of the sacred vessels (Ex. 30:26). The high priest and the king are thus called “the anointed” (Lev. 4:3, 5, 16; 6:20; Ps. 132:10). Anointing a king was equivalent to crowning him (1 Sam. 16:13; 2 Sam. 2:4, etc.). Prophets were also anointed (

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
τοὺςho the G3588 Article · accusative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APM — Article · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
ὀφθαλμούςophthalmos eyes G3788 Noun · accusative · plural · masculine
100× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for eye, it can also mean vision or sight, as in Matthew 5:38 and Luke 6:41. Figuratively, it can represent envy or a jealous glance, as seen in Galatians 4:15.
Amplified meaning
to rub in, to apply
Tyndale gloss
eye
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὀφθαλμός (transliterated as ophthalmos) means 'eye' and is used both literally and figuratively. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often relating to physical sight, metaphorical vision, and ethical qualities like envy. The word is derived from roots associated with seeing and encompasses a range of meanings, including the eye's role in perception and understanding.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὀφθαλμός, -οῦ, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for עַיִן;]

the eye (as in cl., chiefly pl.): Mt 5:38, Mk 9:47, Lk 6:41, Jo 9:6, al.; τοὺς ὀ. ἐξορύθσσειν (fig.), Ga 4:15; ἐπᾶραι, Lk 6:20, Jo 6:5; ἀνοῖξα, Ac 9:40; id., of restoring sight, Mt 20:33, Jo 9:10, al.; ἐν ῥιπῇ ὀφθαλμοῦ, I Co 15:52; by anthropom., of God, He 4:13, I Pe 3:12; pleonastically (cf.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὀφθαλμός, -ov, ὁ, [fr. τ. dm to see; allied to ὄψις, ὄψομαι, etc.; Curtius § 627], Sept. for py, [fr. Hom. down], the eye: Mt. v. 38; Mk. ix.47; Lk. xi. 34; Jn. ix. 6; 1 Co. xii. 16; Rev. vii.17; xxi. 4, and often; pum) ὀφθαλμοῦ, 1 Co. xv. 52; of ὀφθαλμοί pov εἶδον (see the remark in γλῶσσα, 1), Lk. ii. 30; ef. iv. 20; x. 23; Mt. xiii. 16; 10Co.ii.9; Rev.i.7; [ἀνέβλεψαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί Mt. xx. 34 RG]; ἰδεῖν τοῖς ὀφθ., Mt. xiii. 15; Jn. xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27; ὁρᾶν τοῖς ὀφθ. (see dpaw, 1), 1 Jn. i. 1; ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῶν ὀφθ. desire excited by seeing, 1 Jn. ii. 16. Since the eye is the index of the mind, the foll. phrases have arisen: ὀφθ. σου πονηρός ἐστιν, i. 6. thou art envious, Mt. xx. 15; ὀφθ. πονηρός, envy, Mk. vii. 22 (yy yr, an envious man, Prov. xxiii. 6; xxviii. 22; cf. Sir. xxxiv. 13; JNA JPY Apr, thine eye is evil toward thy brother, i. e. thou enviest [grudgest] thy brother, Deut.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὀφθαλμός is naturally common in personal descriptions, e.g. P Ryl II. 1594 5 (A.D. 31-2) οὐ(λὴ) ὑπ᾽ ὀφθίαλμὸν) δεξιόν, Ρ Leid λάμποντες ἐν ταῖς κόραις τῶν ἀνθρώπων, of a god's eyes. The phrase eto, domzine, ut eum ant oculos habeas tanguam me, in a Latin letter of recommendation on papyrus, P Oxy I. 328 (ii/a.p.), may be paralleled from such passages as P Par 634 (B.c. 164) (=P Petr III. p. 22) avr ὀφθαλμῶν [θεμένου]ς, ‘keeping it before your eyes” (Mahaffy), P Tebt I. 2818 (c. B.c. 114) ὅπως Kal ot λοιποὶ προοφθάλμως λαβόντες τὴν] ἐσομένην ὑπὸ σοῦ μισοπόνηρον ἔπίστα[σιν, ‘in order that the rest may obtain a conspicuous illustration to show how you will suppress wrongdoing ’’ (Edd.), BGU II. 3627. 8 (A.D. 215) mpd ὀφθαλμῶν θέμενος [τ]ὰ κελευσθέντα ὑπὸ Αὐρηϊλίου] ᾿Ιταλικοῦ, and from the inscrr. Sy// 226 (= %495)!2° (c. B.c. 230) τὰ δεινὰ πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν ποιούμενος παρεκάλει πάντας τοὺς…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὀφθαλμός (ophthalmos) — eye.

ὀφθαλμός, ὁ,

(ὄπωπ-α, ὀφ-θῆναι, see at {ὄψ} B) eye, used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] mostly in plural; ὀφθαλμοὶ δ᾽ ὡς εἰ κέρα ἕστασαν.. ἀτρέμας ἐν βλεφάροισι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: the plural continued most common, but the dual also occurs, as in [Refs 5th c.BC+] before one's eyes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ἰδεῖν, ὁρᾶσθαι, etc.,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; but ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὁρᾶν, νοεῖν, to see before one's eyes,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔχειν ἐν ὀ. to have before one's eyes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἐν ὀ. what is before one's eyes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ἐν τοῖς ὀ. δὴ γελοῖον what was ridiculous to the eye, [Refs]; ἐπίπροσθε τῶν ὀ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; γενέσθαι τινὶ ἐξ ὀφθαλμῶν to get out of any one's sight, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ὀφθαλμοὺς λέγειν τινί to tell one to one's face, opposed to εἰς οὖς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τυράννου κατ᾽ ὀ. κατηγορεῖν to accuse him to his face…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὀφθαλμός

ophthalmos

from 3700; the eye (literally or figuratively); by implication,

vision; figuratively, envy (from the jealous side-glance):--eye,

sight.

see GREEK for 3700

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὀφθαλμός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

the eye

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὀφθαλμός ophthalmos 100x

an eye, Mt. 5:29, 38; 6:23; 7:3, 4, 5; ὀφθαλμὸς πονηρός, an evil eye, an envious eye, envy, Mt. 20:15; Mk. 7:22; met. the intellectual eye, Mt. 13:15; Mk. 8:18; Jn. 12:40; Acts 26:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὀφθαλμός ὀφθαλμός, οῦ, ὁ, from ΟΠ, Root of ὄψομαι, ὀφθῆναι the eye, mostly in pl., Hom., etc.; ἐλθεῖν ἐς ὀφθαλμούς τινος to come before one's eyes, Il.; ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν before one's eyes, Lat. in oculis, Hom., attic; πρὸ τῶν ὀφθ. Aeschin.; ἐξ ὀφθαλμῶν out of one's sight, Hdt.; κατ᾽ ὀφθαλμούς to one's face, Ar.

in sg. the eye of a master or ruler, πάντα ἰδὼν Διὸς ὀφθ. Hes.; so a king is called ὀφθ. οἴκων Aesch.; and in Persia ὀφθαλμὸς βασιλέως, the king's eye, was a confidential officer, through whom he beheld his subjects, Hdt., Ar., etc.

ἑσπέρας ὀφθ., νυκτὸς ὀφθ., of the moon, Pind.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APM — Noun · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Thompson Chain Reference topics

to be guarded against evil

Ps 119:37; Pr 4:25; Isa 33:15; Mt 5:29

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
66%eyes
eyes66% · 67×eye29% · 29×eyes?3% · 3×other renderings2% · 2×

101 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object43%subject28%adverbial22%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 100 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνἐκαὐτός
δύο
Disj
ἐν
θαυμαστόςwonderful, marve
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
γέμωI am full of
ζῷονan animalἔσωθενfrom within, ins
ὀφθαλμόςeyes100×
what comes after →
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,καμμύωI closeοὐδείςno one, none, no
σύ
καίand, even, also,Article theἁπλοῦςsingle, simple,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theὀδούςa toothἐμβριμάομαιI snort, express
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherβλέπωI look, seeἸησοῦςJesus
ἐγώ
Article theοὐNegὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὀφθαλμός · 100× in the New Testament
Matthew John Luke Revelation Acts Mark 1 Corinthians 1 John Romans Galatians 1 Peter 2 Peter
Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 302 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Polycarp The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 30c. AD 40

τοσούτῳ γὰρ τὸ νοητὸν τοῦ ὁρατοῦ λαμπρότερόν τε καὶ αὐγοειδέστερον ὅσῳπερ ἥλιος, οἶμαι, σκότους καὶ ἡμέρα νυκτὸς καὶ [τὰ κριτήρια] νοῦς, ὁ τῆς ὅλης ψυχῆς ἡγεμών, ὀφθαλμῶν σώματος.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.328c. AD 75–95

πένθος τε ἦν καὶ ὀδυρμοὶ γυναικῶν καὶ παίδων πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν ἐχόντων τὸν ὄλεθρον ὄρεσι καὶ θαλάττῃ περικεκλεισμένων καὶ πολεμίοις καὶ φυγὴν οὐδαμόθεν ἐκ τούτων ἐπινοούντων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 14.7c. AD 100

λέγει οὖν ὁ προφήτης: Ἐγὼ κύριος, ὁ θεός σου, ἐκάλεσά σε ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ κρατήσω τῆς χειρός σου καὶ ἐνισχύσω σε, καὶ ἔδωκά σε εἰς διαθήκην γένους, εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς τυφλῶν καὶ ἐξαγαγεῖν ἐκ δεσμῶν πεπεδημένους καὶ ἐξ οἴκου φυλακῆς…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD
P.Coll.Youtie 1 19Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 44

ὑπτίωι, τῆι ἑαυτῆς Φιλοξένας ἀδελφῆι Εὐδαιμονίδι ὡς ἐτῶν κβ μέσηι μελίχρωι μακροπροσώπωι εὐθύρινι λευκὸν ὀφθαλμοῦ δεξιοῦ … μετὰ κυρίου … ὡς ἐτῶν … οὐλὴ μετώπωι ἐκ δεξιῶν, παρακεχωρηκέναι τὴν

P.Amh. 2 74Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 147

οἰκίᾳ μητρικῇ τοῦ πατρὸς τετελευτηκότος, εἰμὶ δὲ ὁ προγεγραμμένος Πανεφρέμμεις ἐτῶν κα, οὐλὴ παρὰ ὀφθαλμὸν δεξιόν· καὶ τοὺς ἀνεψιούς μου Πανεφρέμμειν Ἀγχώφεως νεωτέρου Πανεφρέμμεως μητρὸς Θασῆτος τῆς Στοτοήτεως ἐτῶν

P.Flor. 3 302Herakleia (ArsinoitesAD 151

τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοίτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογεῖ Σοῆρις Ἐριέως ὡς ἐτῶν … … τὸν ὀφθαλμὸν δεξιόν, μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ συγγενοῦς Ἁρποκράτου Σώτου ὡς ἐτων … γ οὐλὴ δακτύλῳ μικρῷ

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
σουsu of you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singular
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2GS — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singular
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύof you2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
ἵναhina so that G2443 Conjunction
669× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'in order that' or 'to', showing purpose or result, as seen in Acts 19:4 and Romans 11:31. It's used to express a goal or outcome. In Ephesians 1:17, it's used to describe a purpose.
Tyndale gloss
in order that/to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἵνα is primarily a conjunction meaning 'in order that' or 'that,' indicating purpose or intention. It can also function as an adverb of place, meaning 'where' or 'whither.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often introducing clauses that express purpose, such as in Matthew 1:22. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings or usages.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἵνα,

adverb (poët., Hom., al.),

of place, where, whither.

of circumstance, when.

Conjunction,

prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Ac 19:4, Ro 11:31 (?), Ga 2:10, al.);

c. optat. (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph 1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; v. Burton, § 225, Rem., 2);

c. subjc.: after a pres., Mk 4:21, Lk 6:34, Jo 3:15, Ac 2:25,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 186 sqq-.) thought he had found two examples in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have leatned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the second, iva αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. “ iva I. a final Conjunction (for from local direction, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy te mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα pn, that not, lest; it is used…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἵνα (hina) — in order that/to.

ἵνα,

adverb,

I. of Place,

I.1. in that place, there, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.2. elsewhere relative, in which place, where,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵ. ἡ Νίκη (i.e. ἐστίν) [Refs 8th c.BC+] [same place]; ἵν᾽ ἄν with subjunctive, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as indirect interrogative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. b after [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔμαθε ἵ. ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵν᾽ ἕσταμεν χρείας[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. c with Verbs of motion, whither, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. of circumstance, γάμος.., ἵ. χρή at which, when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵ. μὲν ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς.., ἐνταῦθα.. when it was in their power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. ={ἐάν}, uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἵνα

hina

probably from the same as the former part of 1438 (through the

demonstrative idea; compare 3588); in order that (denoting the purpose

or the result):--albeit, because, to the intent (that), lest, so as,

(so) that, (for) to. Compare 3363.

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3363

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἵνα

Cj.

in order that, so that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἵνα hina 663x

that, in order that, Mt. 19:13; Mk. 1:38; Jn. 1:22; 3:15; 17:1; ἵνα μή, that not, lest, Mt. 7:1; in NT equivalent to ὥστε, so that, so as that, Jn. 9:2; also, marking a simple circumstance, the circumstance that, Mt. 10:25; Jn. 4:34; 6:29; 1 Jn. 4:17; 5:3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἵνα Adverb,

of Place,

demonstr. in that place, there, only in Il. 10. 127.

relat., = ὅπου, in which place, where, Hdt., etc.;—so, ἵνα τε Il.; ἵνα περ Hom.:—c. gen., ἵνα γῆς in whatever part of the land, Hdt.; ἔμαθε ἵνα ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, id. Hdt.; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ Soph.

= ὅποι, with Verbs of motion, whither, Od.; ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ ἥκεις Soph.

of circumstance, when, at which, Od.

Final Conjunction, = ὅπως, that, in order that, Lat. ut, Hom.:

with subj.,

after principal tenses of ind., id. Hom., etc.

after historical tenses, in similes, where the aor. refers to any possible time, Od.

after opt. and ἄν, ἔδωκε μένος, ἵνα γένοιτο she gave him vigour, that he might become, Il.

with opt., after historical tenses, Hom., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

so (co', although the Hebrew might be pointed cewe'; Assyrian Sib'u; Septuagint Segor, Soa; Manetho, Seuechos; Latin Sevechus; Herodotus (ii. 137 ff), Sabakon): In all probability the "Sabaeo" of Herodotus, the Shabaka, who founded the Ethiopian dynasty, the XXVth of Egyptian kings. His date is given as 715-707 BC (Flinders Petrie, History of Egypt, III, 281 ff), but we may suppose that before his accession to the throne he was entitled to be designated king, as being actually regent. To this So, Hoshea, king of Israel, made an appeal for assistance to enable him to throw off the yoke of the Assyrian Shalmaneser IV (2Ki 17:3). But Hoshea's submission to So brought him no advantage, for Shalmaneser came up throughout all the land and laid siege to Samaria. Not long after the fall of Samaria, So ventured upon an eastern campaign, and…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

So

(Nubian, Sabako), an Ethiopian king who brought Egypt under his sway. He was bribed by Hoshea to help him against the Assyrian monarch Shalmaneser (2 Kings 17:4). This was a return to the policy that had been successful in the reign of Jeroboam I.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

"So, king of Egypt," is once mentioned in the Bible -- (2 Kings 17:4) So has been identified by different writers with the first and second kings of the Ethiopian twenty-fifth dynasty, called by Manetho, Sabakon (Shebek) and Sebichos (Shebetek).

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

King of Egypt, made an alliance with Hoshea king of Israel, and promised him assistance; but was unable to prevent Shalmaneser king of Assyria from taking Samaria and subverting the kingdom, B. C. 721, 2Ki 17:4. See PHARAOH.

So is believed to have been the Servetus or Sabaco II of secular history, the second king of the Ethiopian or twenty-fifth dynasty, and the predecessor of Trihakah. A singular fact has been brought to light by the recent explorations at Nineveh, corroborating the Scripture record the more forcibly, because unexpected and direct. The Bible shows that Egypt and Assyria, though remote, were often in conflict during the height of the Assyrian ruins power, and that So was at war with Shalmaneser. After war comes the treaty of peace; and as the Bible prepares us to suppose such treaties were made, the Assyrian ruins…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
56%that
that56% · 382×so that40% · 271×other renderings4% · 24×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial8%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 669 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
παρακαλέωI summon, entreaἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide,δίδωμιI offer, give
σύ
λαλέωI speak, sayδιάδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐγώ
δίδωμιI offer, giveὑπέρπερί
ἀλλάbut, except
αὐτόςκόσμοςthe world, univeἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
τίςIrgἐγώἱκανόςsufficient, wort
ἵναso that669×
what comes after →
μήNeg
Article theτὶςεἰς
Article the
γραφήa writing, passaχαράjoy, gladnessλόγοςa word, speech,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theσύαὐτός
ἐν
αὐτόςἐγώὅς
εἰμίI am, exist
μετάεἷςoneἅγιοςset apart, holy,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἵνα · 669× in the New Testament
John Mark 1 Corinthians Luke 2 Corinthians Revelation Matthew Romans Ephesians Hebrews 1 John Acts

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 300 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.71c. AD 75–95

ἵνα καὶ τῆς πλινθίνης ἀφανισθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἡ λιθίνη μείνασα παράσχῃ μαθεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα δηλοῦσα καὶ πλινθίνην ὑπʼ αὐτῶν ἀνατεθῆναι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Edg. $1Alexandria259 BC–257 BC

καὶ θεῶν μὴ ὀκνήσῃς διελθὼν εἰς ἐμπόριον καὶ ἀγοράσας, οὐθὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἡμᾶς ἐπικωλύει, ἵνα μὴ ὑστερήσωμεν τῆς ἐργασίας. τὰς δὲ τιμὰς τούτων λαβὲ παρὰ Ἀπολλοφάνους. τὸ γύναιον ἐπίτοκον

vestiges … ἵνα μηθὲν ἐν τούτοις ἀγνοηθῆι … … Ἑρμίαι τῶν διαδόχων καὶ ἐπιμελητῆι, παρὰ Δρύτωνος τοῦ

P.Bour. 11Pathyris89 BC

ἕκαστος τῶν παρὰ σοὶ σιτοποιησάμενος πυροῦ ἀρτάβην μίαν ἐν ἑτοίμωι ἔσται αὐτοῖς ὁ ἄρτος, ἵνα δὲ καὶ κριθὴ ὑπάρξηι ἐπιμε … … ηγησαιἐμμέτρως αἴτησαιἐμμε … … τησαι ἔρρωσο ἔτους

I counsel you to buy from Me gold refined by fire so that you may be rich, and garments white so that you may be clothed and not may be made manifest the shame of the nakedness of you, and eye-salve so that to anoint the eyes of you so that you may see.
βλέπῃς.blepō you may see. G991 Verb · present · active · subjunctive · second person · singular
133× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To see means to look at or perceive something, whether physically or mentally, as described in Matthew 12:22 and John 9:7. It involves using one's senses to understand or become aware of something, often with the intention of gaining insight or knowledge.
Amplified meaning
perceive, understand
Tyndale gloss
to see
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word βλέπω (i.e., *blepo*) primarily means 'to see' or 'to look at,' encompassing both physical sight and metaphorical perception. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 12:22 and Acts 9:9, where it denotes both literal and figurative understanding. The word can also imply caution or attention, as seen in references to 'bewaring' in Mark 8:15. No significant disagreements among lexicons were noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βλέπω,

[in LXX chiefly for ראה, also for פּנה, etc. ;]

of bodily sight;

to see, have sight (opp. to τυφλὸς εἶναι): Mt 12:22, Jo 9:7, Ac 9:9, Ro 11:8, Re 3:18, al.;

to perceive, look (at), see: absol., Ac 1:9; c. acc., Mt 7:3, Mk 5:31, Lk 6:41, Jo 1:29, al.; ὅραμα, Ac 12:9; γυναῖκα, Mt 5:28; βιβλίον,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βλέπω ; [impf. ἔβλεπον] ; fut. βλέψω ; 1 aor. ἔβλεψα ; [pres. pass. βλέπομαι]; Sept. for ANI, 739, Tin, wan; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; to see, discern; al with the bodily eye; a. to be possessed of sight, have the power of seeing, opp. to τυφλός : Mt. xii. 22: xiii. 16; xy. 31; Jn. ix. 7, 15,19, 25; Acts ix. 9; Ro. xi. 8, 10; Rev. iii. 18, ete. (Soph. Oed. Col. 73; Arstph. Plut. 15; Xen. mem. 1, 3,4; Ael. v. h. 6, 12, ete. Ex. iv. 11; xxiii. 8, ete. Tob. xi. 15). τὸ βλέπειν sight, the power of seeing, Lk. vii. 21 (GL TTrWHom. τό). b. to perceive by the use of the eyes, to see, look, descry; a. absol.: βλεπόντων αὐτῶν while they were looking, Acts i. 9; [xxii 11 Trmrg. WH mrg.]; ἔρχου καὶ βλέπε, Rec. in Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7. β. with ace. of pers. or thing: Mt. vii. 3; xi. 4; xxiv. 2; Mk. v. 31; viii. 23sq.; xiii. 2; Lk. vi. 41; xxiv. 12[T om. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; Jn.i. 29…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βλέπω. The papyri have added a perfect to the paradigm of this verb: it proves to have been βέβλοφα (P Lond 422!—R.c., 168) (=Witkowski?, p. 63) (see under ἐμβλέπω). It is hard to believe that a form so correct historically, and so distant from any obvious analogy, can be anything but a genuine survival, even if it does meet us only ἴῃ ἃ woman’s letter from Ptolemaic Egypt. If this inference is justifiable, the word has a moral for the argument from silence. Βλέπω has primarily the physical sense, as distinguished from ὁρῶ (cf. our cognate ware): this is well seen in ἀναβλέπω = recover sight. Usage bears this out. Thus P Par 445 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski?, p. 83) has βλέπω Μενέδημον κατατρέχοντά pe coming after ἐγὼ yap ἐνύπνια ὁρῶ πονηρά. Soin P Hal I. 85 (B.C. 232) a man is incapacitated—8.a τὸ μὴ βλέπειν τὰς νύκτας, and in P Oxy I. 399 (a.p. 52) ὀλίγον βλέπων = ** shortsighted.” An…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βλέπω (blepō) — to see.

βλέπω,

[Refs 6th c.BC+]: imperfect ἔβλεπον [Refs]: future βλέψομαι [Refs 4th c.BC+], Doric dialect infinitive βλεψεῖσθαι [LXX+2nd c.AD+]aorist ἔβλεψα (see. below): perfect βέβλεφα (ἀπο-) [Refs 5th c.AD+]; βέβλοφα (ἐμ-) [Refs 2nd c.AD+] —passive, aorist ἐβλέφθην (προσ-) [Refs 1st c.AD+]perfect βέβλεμμαι to be supplied in [Refs 2nd c.AD+] —chiefly in present and aorist active in early writers: middle (except future) and passive only late:—see, have the power of sight (distinct from ὁρῶ perceive, be aware of,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; μὴ βλέπων ὁ μάντις ᾖ lest he see too clearly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ βλέπων the seer, Hebraism in [LXX]; ὀλίγον βλέπων short- sighted, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

βλέπω

blepo

a primary verb; to look at (literally or figuratively):--behold,

beware, lie, look (on, to), perceive, regard, see, sight, take heed.

Compare 3700.

see GREEK for 3700

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βλέπω

v.

I look, see

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βλέπω blepō 133x

to have the faculty of sight, to see, Mt. 12:22; to exercise sight, to see, Mt. 6:4; to look towards or at, Mt. 22:16; to face, Acts 27:12; to take heed, Mt. 24:4; in NT, βλέπειν ἀπό, to beware of, shun, Mk. 8:15; trans., to cast a look on, Mt. 5:28; to see, behold, Mt. 13:17; to observe, Mt. 7:3; to have an eye to, see to, Mk.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βλέπω to see, have the power of sight, Soph.; μὴ βλέπηι ὁ μάντις lest he see too clearly, id. Soph.

to look, εἴς τινα or τι, Aesch., etc.; πῶς βλέπων; with what face? Soph.;—with an adv., ἐχθρῶς βλ. πρός τινα Xen.:—foll. by a noun, φόβον βλ. to look terror, i. e. to look terrible, Aesch.; ἔβλεψε νᾶπυ looked mustard, Ar.; πυρρίχην βλέπων looking like a war-dancer, id. Ar.; πεφροντικὸς βλέπειν to look thoughtful, Eur.

to look to some one from whom help is expected, Soph.; εἴς τινα id. Soph., etc.:— of places, οἰκία πρὸς μεσημβρίαν βλέπουσα looking towards the south, Xen.

to look longingly, expect eagerly, c. inf., Ar.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAS-2S — Verb · present · active · subjunctive · second person · singular
present active subjunctive — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAS-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Subjunctive Person: second Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

se: In addition to the ordinary sense of perceiving by the eye, we have

(1) chazah, "to see" (in vision): "Words of Amos .... which he saw concerning Israel" (Am 1:1). The revelation was made to his inward eye. "The word of Yahweh .... which he (Micah) saw concerning Samaria" (Mic 1:1), describing what he saw in prophetic vision (compare Hab 1:1); see REVELATION, III, 4;

(2) horao, "to take heed": "See thou say nothing" (Mr 1:44);

(3) eidon, "to know," "to note with the mind": "Jesus saw that he answered discreetly" (Mr 12:34);

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
14%seeing
seeing14% · 19×do take heed11% · 15×see9% · 12×looking5% · 7×being seen5% · 7×he sees4% · 6×i see4% · 5×we see4% · 5×other renderings44% · 60×

136 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 51 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb94%adverbial5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 133 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀκούωI hear, listenσυνίημιI consider, undeλαλέωI speak, say
Article the
σύπᾶςall, the whole, ὀφθαλμόςthe eye
μήNeg
Article theβλέπωI look, seeτρεῖςthree
οὐNeg
βλέπωI look, seeαὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, po
δέbut, on the other ha
τίςIrgσύἐλπίςhope, expectatio
βλέπωyou may see.133×
what comes after →
Article the
κάρφοςa dry stalk, chiκαπνόςsmokeπρόσωπονthe face, counte
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐNegἀκούωI hear, listenArticle the
μήNeg
τὶςβλέπωI look, seeπλανάωI lead astray, d
εἰς
πρόσωπονthe face, counteArticle theἀλλήλων
βλέπωI look, see
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβλέπω · 133× in the New Testament
Matthew John Luke Mark Acts Revelation Hebrews 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Romans Colossians Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 68 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 53c. AD 40

βλέπει γὰρ ἑκάτερος, ὁ μὲν τὰ νοητά, ὁ δὲ τὰ αἰσθητά·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.35c. AD 75–95

βλέπων δὲ τὸν Ἄδαμον οὐκ ἔχοντα κοινωνίαν πρὸς τὸ θῆλυ καὶ συνδιαίτησιν, οὐδὲ γὰρ ἦν, ξενιζόμενον δʼ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ζῴοις οὕτως ἔχουσι, μίαν αὐτοῦ κοιμωμένου πλευρὰν ἐξελὼν ἐξ αὐτῆς ἔπλασε γυναῖκα.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Oxy. 2 259OxyrhynchosAD 23

με … ἕως ἑαυτὸν αὐτὸν vestiges ποιήσω, εἰ δὲ μὴ ἐμβέβηκεν. ἔρρωσο. βλέπε με πῶς ἡ μήτηρ ἡμῶν ἔσφαξε χάριν τοῦ χειρογράφου … ω … αφ

P.Oxy. 2 317 descr.AlexandriaAD 52

Σεβαστῆι. ἀπελύθη ὑπὸ Γναίου Οὐεργιλλίου Καπίτωνος τοῦ ἡγεμόνος ἀμφοτέρων Τρύφων Διονυσίου γέρδιος, ὑποκεχυμένος ὀλίγον βλέπων, τῶν ἀπʼ Ὀξυρύγχων τῆς μητροπόλεως. ἐπεκρίθη ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ. ἐπεκρίθη ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ. ἐπικέκριται ἐν…

ἐὰν δὲ μὴ μέλλῃς ἔρχεσθαι, πάλιν μοι ἐξαυτῆς φάσιν πέμψον, ἵνα ὧδε αὐτὰ ἀναβάλω. βλέπε οὖν, μὴ ἄλλως ποιήσῃς. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους β Σερουίου Γάλβα Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ, Φαῶφι θ.

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate